Ricoh IM C300 Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ricoh Manuals
  4. Printer
  5. IM C300
  6. Service manual

Ricoh IM C300 Service Manual

Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
D0CA/D0C9/
D0C8/D0CB
SERVICE MANUAL
Rev. 08/26/2021

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Ricoh IM C300

Summary of Contents for Ricoh IM C300

  • Page 1 D0CA/D0C9/ D0C8/D0CB SERVICE MANUAL Rev. 08/26/2021...
  • Page 2 It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh USA, Inc. and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH USA, Inc.
  • Page 3 Ricoh USA, Inc. Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained uncertified users...
  • Page 5 LEGEND COMPANY PRODUCT CODE LANIER RICOH SAVIN D0AC IM C300 IM C300 IM C300 D0C9 IM C300F IM C300F IM C300F D0C8 IM C400F IM C400F IM C400F D0CB IM C300SRF IM C300SRF IM C300SRF DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV. NO. DATE...

  • Page 7: Table Of Contents

    D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ............1-1 1.1 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN IM C300/C400 AND MP C307/C407 ........ 1-1 1.2 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS CONFIGURATION ........1-3 1.2.1 MAIN MACHINE ....................1-3 1.2.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ................1-3 1.2.3 OPTIONS ......................1-5 1.3 SPECIFICATIONS ......................
  • Page 8 Connecting the Telephone Cord (Fax Standard Model) ........2-22 2.4.7 LOADING PAPER, IMAGE QUALITY TEST ............. 2-22 Loading Paper ....................... 2-22 Paper Registration ....................2-23 Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) ............... 2-23 Color Registration (Color Skew Adjustment)............2-24 Remove the paper exit tray [A]................2-25 Open the front cover.
  • Page 9 Before You Begin the Procedure ................2-46 Enable Encryption Setting ..................2-46 Backing Up the Encryption Key................2-48 Encryption Key Restoration ................... 2-49 2.8 "WEB HELP SUPPORT" SETTINGS ................2-51 2.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................... 2-51 2.8.2 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE WEB HELP SUPPORT ........2-52 2.9 "REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT"...
  • Page 10 2.17.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............... 2-105 2.18 DEHUMIDIFICATION HEATER (MAIN UNIT) ............ 2-112 2.18.1 ACCESSORY CHECK FOR IM C300 SERIES ..........2-112 2.18.2 ACCESSORY CHECK FOR IM C400 SERIES ..........2-113 2.18.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR IM C300 SERIES ......... 2-113 2.18.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR IM C400 SERIES ......... 2-120 2.19...
  • Page 11 IP Address Setting ....................2-149 2.20.6 ENHANCED SECURITY HDD OPTION TYPE M10 (D792-09) ..... 2-150 Accessory Check ....................2-150 Installation Procedure ..................2-151 After Installing the HDD ..................2-153 2.21 SD CARD OPTIONS ................... 2-155 2.21.1 SD CARD APPLI MOVE .................. 2-155 Overview ......................
  • Page 12 4.3 SPECIAL TOOLS ......................4-5 4.3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ..............4-5 4.3.2 WHERE TO APPLY NOISE-REDUCTION GREASE .......... 4-6 Drive: Fusing Drive Unit ..................4-6 Drive Unit Fusing Drive Gear .................. 4-6 Drive: Transport Drive Unit: IM C300 series ............4-7 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 13 4.4.5 RIGHT REAR COVER ..................4-35 4.4.6 PAPER EXIT TRAY ................... 4-37 Paper Exit Tray for IM C300 series/IM C400F ............4-37 Paper Exit Front Cover/Paper Exit Upper Cover/Paper Exit Tray for IM C400SRF4-37 4.4.7 SCANNER INNER COVER ................4-38 IM C300 series/IM C400F ..................
  • Page 14 4.6.5 PICKUP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER ..............4-56 Before replacing the pickup roller and feed roller, reset the PM counter....4-56 Remove the original feed unit. (Original Feed Unit) ..........4-56 Remove the original feed unit. (Original Feed Unit) ..........4-57 4.6.6 ADF FRICTION PAD ..................
  • Page 15 PM counters are automatically cleared after turning the main power ON............4-120 Pull out the paper tray.(This procedure is for IM C300 series/IM C400F) ..4-120 4.11.2 WASTE TONER FULL SENSOR (S36) ............4-121 4.11.3 WASTE TONER BOTTLE SET SENSOR (S26) ..........
  • Page 16 4.12.4 ID SENSOR (M27-M29) .................. 4-129 Before Installing a New ID Sensor Board ............4-130 4.12.5 ID SENSOR SHUTTER SOLENOID (SOL2) ..........4-131 4.12.6 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT ............... 4-132 Before replacing the paper transfer roller unit, reset the PM counter....4-132 Open the right door.
  • Page 17 4.16.6 BYPASS TRAY LIFT SENSOR (S4) ............... 4-186 4.16.7 BYPASS TRAY LIFT CLUTCH (CL1) .............. 4-187 4.17 PAPER EXIT ......................4-188 4.17.1 IM C300 SERIES/IM C400F ................4-188 Paper Exit Unit ....................4-188 Paper Exit Sensor (S7)..................4-189 Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1) ................4-190...
  • Page 18 Paper Exit Clutch (CL3), Reverse Clutch (CL2) ..........4-191 4.17.2 IM C400SRF ....................4-193 Paper Exit Unit ....................4-193 Paper Exit Sensor (S7)..................4-194 Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1) ................4-195 Paper Exit Clutch (CL3), Reverse Clutch (CL2) ..........4-196 4.18 DUPLEX ......................
  • Page 19 Scanner Sub-Scan Magnification ................ 4-252 Scanner Leading Edge and Side-to-Side Registration ........4-252 4.20.3 ADF ADJUSTMENT ..................4-253 ADF Side-to-Side and Leading Edge Registration ..........4-253 ADF Trailing Edge Erase Width ................4-253 ADF Sub-scan Magnification ................4-254 4.20.4 REGISTRATION ....................4-254 Adjustment Standard ...................
  • Page 20 Preparation ......................5-6 Note for Update ....................... 5-6 Using the Slot on the Back of the Machine ............. 5-7 Using the Slot on the Operation Panel (Immediate Update) ........5-8 Using the Slot on the Operation Panel (Reserve) ..........5-10 5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SMART FIRMWARE UPDATE) ..........
  • Page 21 5.10.1 INFORMATION LIST ..................5-46 5.10.2 DOWNLOAD ..................... 5-46 5.10.3 UPLOAD ......................5-47 5.11 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION ................5-48 5.11.1 OVERVIEW ....................... 5-48 5.11.2 PROCEDURE ....................5-48 5.11.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS ............5-50 5.11.4 ERROR MESSAGES ..................5-51 5.12 CAPTURING THE DEVICE LOGS ...............
  • Page 22 6.3 SC2XX: EXPOSURE ....................6-15 6.3.1 WHEN SC285-00 (MUSIC ERROR) IS DISPLAYED ........6-20 An abnormal value may be contained in the SP where the MUSIC corrected result is saved........................6-21 Execute MUSIC and check the result..............6-21 Execute SP2-112-001 (TM/ID Sensor Check: Execute).
  • Page 23 recognizing whether the original is full color or black-and-white......6-135 Using SP4-939-001 (ACS:Color Range), you can adjust the level of (1) Chromatic Color Recognition for recognizing whether the original is full color or black-and-white....................6-136 6.12.4 MISRECOGNITION OF AUTO COLOR SELECTION (COPY/SCANNER) ... 6-136 Error Condition ....................
  • Page 24 6.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ............6-160 6.14.1 SENSORS ....................... 6-160 6.14.2 FUSE LOCATION .................... 6-165 6.15 JAM DETECTION ....................6-167 6.15.1 PAPER JAM HISTORY ................... 6-167 Plotter (print engine) jam history can be displayed using SP7-507. The jam history of the 10 latest jams is displayed................ 6-167 SP7-507 shows the paper jam history.
  • Page 25 7.4 INTERNAL FINISHER ....................7-34 7.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................... 7-34 7.4.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT ..................7-34 7.4.3 PAPER FEED ....................7-35 7.4.4 FINISHER FREE RUN ..................7-40 7.4.5 JOGGER FENCE FINE ADJUSTMENT ............7-40 7.5 LASER UNIT ........................ 7-41 7.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................... 7-41 7.5.2 LASER SYNCHRONIZING SYSTEM ...............
  • Page 26 7.11.4 FUSING DRIVE ....................7-77 7.11.5 FUSING MODE CONTROL ................7-78 7.11.6 CPM DOWN CONTROL ................... 7-79 7.12 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION (IM C300 SERIES) ........7-80 7.12.1 OVERVIEW ....................... 7-80 7.12.2 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR (M12) .............. 7-81 7.12.3 TRAY LIFT MECHANISM .................. 7-82 7.12.4 TRANSPORT CONTROL ..................
  • Page 27 7.16 DUPLEX ........................ 7-96 7.16.1 OVERVIEW ....................... 7-96 7.16.2 DUPLEX MECHANISM ..................7-99 7.16.3 INTERLEAVING ....................7-101 7.17 PAPER EXIT AND INVERTER ................7-103 7.17.1 OVERVIEW ..................... 7-103 7.17.2 PAPER EXIT OPERATION ................7-105 7.17.3 INVERTER OPERATION ................7-107 7.18 ELECTRICAL PARTS ..................
  • Page 28 Hardware Specifications ..................8-10 Software Specifications ..................8-13 On the Smart Operation Panel, applications can be installed in addition to the pre-installed applications..................8-14 Communication Specifications ................8-14 8.2.2 PANEL COMPONENTS/SCREEN LAYOUT ............. 8-17 Components of the Control Panel ................. 8-17 Panel Display......................
  • Page 29 MultiTouch Calibration ................... 8-45 eMMC Erasure Count .................... 8-45 MultiTouch Sensitivity Adjustment ................. 8-46 If the sensitivity level is set to "0", the MultiTouch function is turned off and you cannot pinch in or out.................... 8-46 Press [Detect level confirmation]................8-46 8.3.5 RECOVERY MODE ...................
  • Page 30 If using a third-party application, the error message, code and solution may vary depending on the application. Follow the third-party vendor’s instructions..8-61 8.4.4 FACTORY RESET AND RESTORATION ............8-62 Factory Reset ......................8-62 8.4.5 ERRORS THAT OCCUR DURING APPLICATION UPDATE FROM AN SD CARD 8-64 Error Messages .....................
  • Page 31 SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND TRADEMARKS Symbols and Abbreviations This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows: Symbol What it means Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp E-ring Flat Flexible Cable Timing Belt Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed Black Cyan...
  • Page 32 Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license. Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
  • Page 33 Internet Explorer® 10 • • Internet Explorer® 11 The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows: The product names of Windows Vista are as follows: • Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium Microsoft®...
  • Page 34 Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks. Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

  • Page 35: Product Information

    PRODUCT INFORMATION...

  • Page 37: Differences Between Im C300/C400 And Mp C307/C407

    Differences between IM C300/C400 and MP C307/C407 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION 1.1 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN IM C300/C400 AND MP C307/C407 The following table describes the differences between IM C300/C400 series and MP C307/C407 series: Items IM C300 /C400 series MP C307/C407 Main power switch position...
  • Page 38 Differences between IM C300/C400 and MP C307/C407 Items IM C300 /C400 series MP C307/C407 (only for C400SRF) Paper Feed unit (main unit) 500 sheets 250 sheets (only for C400F/C400SRF) Paper Feed Mechanism Roller friction system Friction pad (only for C400F/C400SRF)

  • Page 39: Machine Codes And Peripherals Configuration

    NA = North America, EU = Europe, AA = Asia-Pacific, CHN = China, TWN = Taiwan, KOR = Korea Product name Machine Code Remarks Initial configuration IM C300 D0CA IM C300 for EU/AA IM C300F D0C9 IM C300F for NA/EU/AA/TWN/KOR IM C400F D0C8 IM C400F for NA/EU/AA/CHN IM C400SRF...
  • Page 40 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration Item Machine Code Remarks New Option? 1 Bin Tray BN1040 [1] D574 Page Keeper Type M28 [2] D3DQ Only for NA/EU Paper Feed Unit PB1170 [3] D3GQ Up to 3 can be stacked Caster Table Type M41 [4] D3GW D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 41: Options

    Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration 1.2.3 OPTIONS Item Machine Code Remarks New Option? 1 Bin Tray BN1040 D574 Page Keeper Type M28 D3DQ Only for NA/EU Paper Feed Unit PB1170 D3GQ Max 3 can be installed Caster Table Type M41 D3GW NA = North America, EU = Europe, AA = Asia-Pacific, CHN = China, TWN = Taiwan, KOR = Korea...
  • Page 42 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration Item Machine Code Remarks Option? M19 [3] Device Server D3GF-10 (NA) Option Type M37 D3GF-11 (EU, AA, KOR) Camera Direct D3GF-30 If multiple applications are required, Print Card Type merge all applications into one SD M37 [4] card with the SP mode.

  • Page 43: Specifications

    Specifications 1.3 SPECIFICATIONS See "Appendices" for the following information: Specifications • • Supported Paper Sizes • Software Accessories Optional Equipment • D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 45: Installation

    INSTALLATION...

  • Page 47: Installation Requirements

    Installation Requirements 2. INSTALLATION 2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F) Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH Ambient Illumination: Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight) Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more Avoid direct exposure to the following: 1) Cool air from an air conditioner 2) Heat from a heater...

  • Page 48: Machine Space Requirements

    This machine uses high voltage power sources and can generate ozone gas. High ozone density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a well-ventilated room. IM C300 series / IM C400F: Over 7 cm (2.75") IM C400SRF: Over 5 cm (1.96") Over 10 cm (3.93") IM C300 series / IM C400F: Over 40.2 cm (15.82")

  • Page 49: Machine Dimensions

    Installation Requirements 2.1.4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS Model* W×D×H IM C300 498 x 561 x 510 mm (19.6" × 23.0" × 20.1") IM C300F 554 x 561 x 595 mm (21.9" × 23.0" × 23.4") IM C400F 498 x 561 x 590 mm (19.6" × 23.0" × 23.2") IM C400SRF 615 x 561 x 706 mm (24.2"...

  • Page 50: When The Operation Panel Is Upright: 825 X 561 Mm

    Installation Requirements When the operation panel is upright: 825 x 561 mm • When the operation panel is face up: 825 x 605 mm Callout mm (inch) Callout mm (inch) 546.2 mm (approx. 21.5") 554 mm (approx. 21.8") 498 mm (approx. 19.6") 595 mm (approx.
  • Page 51 Installation Requirements Callout mm (inch) Callout mm (inch) 505 mm (approx. 19.9") 654 mm (approx. 25.7") 590 mm (approx. 23.2") 560 mm (approx. 22") 621 mm (approx. 24.4") 706 mm (approx. 27.7") Callout mm (inch) Note 1068 mm IM C400SRF (approx.42.0") 1153 mm [A] + ADF...

  • Page 52: Power Requirements

    Installation Requirements 2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS Insert the plug firmly into the outlet. • Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord. • • Ground the machine. Input voltage level: 110 V, 60 Hz More than 11 A • • 120 to 127 V, 60 Hz: More than 11 A 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 5.5 A •...

  • Page 53: Main Machine Installation: Important Notice On Security Issues

    Main Machine Installation: Important Notice on Security Issues 2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: IMPORTANT NOTICE ON SECURITY ISSUES 2.2.1 OVERVIEW To increase the security of the MFP and ensure the customer sets an administrator password, an administrator set/change prompt is displayed when the machine is turned on for the first time.

  • Page 54: Password Setting Procedure

    Main Machine Installation: Important Notice on Security Issues • For more details about security issues of MFPs refer to the "Notes on Using Multi-Function Printers Safely" supplied with the MFP. When Supervisor/Administrator 1-4 passwords are configured via network, the • "Change Supervisor login password"...
  • Page 55 Main Machine Installation: Important Notice on Security Issues Change the administrator 1 login password. Input the password, and then press [OK]. Confirm the password, and then press [OK]. Turn the main power OFF and back ON again. The passwords for Supervisor or Administrator 1 to 4 can be set via "System Settings", but the Program/Change Administrator screen appears every time the power switch is turned ON if the passwords are set with this method.

  • Page 56: Main Machine Installation: Accessory Check

    Main Machine Installation: Accessory Check 2.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: ACCESSORY CHECK 2.3.1 FOR IM C300/C300F Check the quantity and condition of these accessories. Description Remark Q’ty NA EU AA/KOR TWN Decal – Emblem For the front cover Decal – Paper Size / Tray Number...

  • Page 57: For Im C400F/C400Srf

    Main Machine Installation: Accessory Check 2.3.2 FOR IM C400F/C400SRF Check the quantity and condition of these accessories. Description Remark Q’ty NA EU AA CHN Decal – Emblem For the front cover Decal – Paper Size / Tray Number CE Marking Traceability Information Only for EU Ferrite Core Modular Cord with Ferrite Core...

  • Page 58: Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures 2.4 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 2.4.1 INSTALLATION FLOWCHART The flowcharts as shown below show the best procedure for installation. IM C300 series/IM C400F D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 2-12...

  • Page 59: Packaging Tapes, Retainers And Toner Bottles

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures IM C400SRF 2.4.2 PACKAGING TAPES, RETAINERS AND TONER BOTTLES To install the main unit and the optional paper feed unit at the same time, first install • the optional paper feed unit, and then install the main unit and other options. Remove the main unit from the packing box and check the supplied items.

  • Page 60: Im C300 Series/Im C400F

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 2-14...
  • Page 61 Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures Pull out the paper feed tray and remove the packaging tapes and protective sheet [A] inside. Open the ADF, and then remove all the tapes and the retainer (protective sheet) [A] from the exposure glass. Open the front cover [A].
  • Page 62 Do not remove the packaging tape [A] at this time. • Do the following procedure to remove the waste toner bottle. IM C300 series Close the front cover, and then remove the paper feed tray. Open the front cover again, and then remove the waste toner bottle [A].
  • Page 63 Remove the waste toner bottle [A]. Remove the packaging tape [A] attached to the lever. Set the lever [A] to the upright position. 10. Attach the waste toner bottle. 11. Attach the paper feed tray removed in Step 7 (IM C300 series only). 2-17 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 64 Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures 12. Shake each toner bottle five or six times. 13. Install each toner bottle [A] in the machine. Install the black toner bottle first. K (Black) bottle is larger than the other colors, C, M, and Y. To prevent bottles getting stuck in different holders, begin installing with K (Black) bottle and then C, M, and Y.

  • Page 65: Cleaning Cloth Holder

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures The Program/Change Administrator screen is displayed at the first power-up. Follow • the procedure in Main Machine Installation: Important Notice on Security Issues. 18. After the toner initialization is completed, the machine beeps, and the following message is displayed.

  • Page 66: Installing The Finisher Extension Tray (Im C400Srf Only)

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures 2.4.4 INSTALLING THE FINISHER EXTENSION TRAY (IM C400SRF ONLY) Install the extension tray [A] in the finisher. 2.4.5 BRAND PLATE, DECALS Attach the brand plate [A] to the front cover, if it is not attached. Attach the tray number [A] and paper size [B] decals to the paper feed tray.

  • Page 67: Store Unused Decals In The Designated Location As Follows (Step 1 And 2, Apply To Only Imc300 Series)

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures Store unused decals in the designated location as follows (Step 1 and 2, apply to ONLY IMC300 series): Pull out the paper feed tray. Remove the front lower cover [A]. Open the front cover. Remove the inner cover [A]. Store the decals in the area [B].

  • Page 68: Telephone Cord (Fax Standard Model)

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures 2.4.6 TELEPHONE CORD (FAX STANDARD MODEL) Notes for Connecting the Telephone Line Check the following before connecting the telephone line: If a phone line dedicated to business phones is connected to the MFP, the fax board may be damaged.

  • Page 69: Paper Registration

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures Pull out the paper feed tray until it stops. Release the side fences. Load paper into the paper feed tray. Set the side fences according to the paper size while pressing the unlock lever. Set the end fence according to the paper size while pressing the unlock lever. Paper Registration Adjust the registration setting for paper trays.

  • Page 70: Color Registration (Color Skew Adjustment)

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures Press [Start Scanning]. The machine starts the ACC. - Printer mode - Then, Press [Start Auto Calibration] for "Printer Function". Press [Quick Test Pattern], then press [Start Printing] to print the test pattern. The test pattern is printed after self-checking. Place the test pattern on the exposure glass, then close the ADF.

  • Page 71: Remove The Paper Exit Tray [A]

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures SP2-117-001 (M) • • SP2-117-003 (Y) The Color Registration (Color Skew Adjustment) should be executed if one or more of the above SP values is not within ±5. No Color Skew Adjustment is required if all SP values are within ±5. The adjustment procedure is as follows: Remove the paper exit tray [A].

  • Page 72: Open The Front Cover

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures [A]: Black, [B]: Cyan, [C]: Magenta, [D]: Yellow Check that the front cover is closed and execute SP2-111-004 (Forced Line Position Adj.: Mode d). Check the SP values for SP2-117–001 to 004 and repeat steps 2 to 4 until the SP values for all colors fall within ±...
  • Page 73 Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures Turn the knob for any color with a value other than "0", until it reads "0". Turning the knob clockwise by 90 degrees changes the SP value by -1. • Turning the knob counter-clockwise by 90 degrees changes the SP value by +1. •...

  • Page 74: Checking The Copy Image With Test Chart

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures Checking the Copy Image with Test Chart Check the copy image quality with a test chart. Non-fax standard model: Check that the printer can print out in the customer’s environment. Fax standard models: Check that the fax can output a received image as well. 2.4.8 AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE (ARFU) SETTINGS Specify ARFU settings as required.

  • Page 75: Enter The Sp Mode

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures Enter the SP mode. Press [Firmware update] > [Update] > [Execute update]. Check if one of the following messages appears: "Will you download the latest package Ver *** and update?" or "The installed package is the latest version.". If any of these messages appear, ARFU can be executed.

  • Page 76: If Error Code 71: [Network Connection Error] Appears When You Click [Firmware Update] > [Update] > [Execute Update] In Sp Mode, Check The Following

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures They can be specified also via Web Image Monitor if logged in as the machine administrator from the device if SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) is set to "1 (ON)". For details, seeSpecifying the Time and Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image Monitor.
  • Page 77 • If access to the external server is restricted, request the network administrator (customer) to permit the following FQDN name for communication.- FQDN: p-rfu-ds2.support.ricoh.com These settings can be specified also via Web Image Monitor if logged in as the machine administrator from the device if SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) is set to "1(ON)".

  • Page 78: Specifying The Time And Day Of The Week To Prohibit Updating Via Web Image Monitor

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures Specifying the Time and Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image Monitor Start Web Image Monitor. Log in as the machine administrator. Go to [Device Management], and then click [Configuration]. Click "Auto Firmware Update". Turn the main power OFF and back ON again after setting SP5-886-111 (AutoUpdateSetting) to "1 (ON)".

  • Page 79: Settings Relevant To The Service Contract

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures Select the check boxes of the applicable days to prohibit updating. 2.4.9 SETTINGS RELEVANT TO THE SERVICE CONTRACT Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service contract. SP No.

  • Page 80: Settings For @Remote Service

    Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures Value Mode Descriptions Color Total Counter B&W Total Counter Coverage Count Color Total Counter B&W Total Counter Color Coverage Counter 1 Color Coverage Counter 2 Color Coverage Counter 3 Coverage Count (YMC) Color Total Counter B&W Total Counter Color Coverage Counter 1 (YMC) Color Coverage Counter 2 (YMC)
  • Page 81 Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures SP5-816-202. Confirm the Request number, and then click [EXECUTE] with SP5-816-203. Check the confirmation result with SP5-816-204. Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround Succeeded Communication error (proxy Check the network condition. enabled) Communication error (proxy Check the network condition. disabled) Proxy error (authentication error) Check Proxy user name and password.
  • Page 82 Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround Request number confirmation Processing… Please wait. executing Already registered Parameter error Dial-up authentication error * These errors occur only in the modems that support @Remote. Answer tone detection error Carrier detection error Invalid setting value (modem) Low power supply current Modem unplugged...
  • Page 83 Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround -2389 Database out of service -2390 Program out of service -2391 Two registrations for the same Check the registration condition of the mainframe mainframe -2392 Parameter error -2393 External RCG not managed -2394 Mainframe not managed -2395 Box ID for external RCG is illegal.

  • Page 84: Main Machine Installation: When Moving The Machine

    Main Machine Installation: When Moving the Machine 2.5 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: WHEN MOVING THE MACHINE Do not lift the machine with any optional paper feed units attached. • If the machine already has one or more optional paper feed unit(s) attached, be sure to disconnect the machine and paper feed unit(s), and lift them up separately when moving/transporting.
  • Page 85 Main Machine Installation: When Moving the Machine Make sure that there is no paper left in the paper trays, and then fix down the bottom plates with a sheet of paper and securing tape. Attach securing tape to stop the waste toner bottle from coming out. Do one of the following: •...

  • Page 86: Network Settings

    Network Settings 2.6 NETWORK SETTINGS 2.6.1 SPECIFYING NETWORK SETTINGS ACCORDING TO CUSTOMER'S ENVIRONMENT Check the customer’s network environment and specify network settings according to the functions to be used (such as a scanner, printer, and Document Server setting). Press the "Settings" icon. Press [System Settings] >...

  • Page 87: Settings On Displaying An Alert When The Ethernet Cable Is Broken Or Disconnected

    Network Settings 2.6.2 SETTINGS ON DISPLAYING AN ALERT WHEN THE ETHERNET CABLE IS BROKEN OR DISCONNECTED Display an alert if the Ethernet cable is disconnected while operating the machine. By default, this setting is set to [OFF] and the interval to display the alert is set to 10 minutes. Specify the setting according to the customer’s request.

  • Page 88: Security Settings

    Security Settings 2.7 SECURITY SETTINGS 2.7.1 SECURITY FUNCTION INSTALLATION If the “Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10” is installed at the same time as the main machine’s installation, do not execute these settings described below. When the “Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10” and security functions (Data •...

  • Page 89: Data Overwrite Security

    Security Settings controller board (PCB24), HDD and NVRAM must all be replaced at the same time. "NVRAM" mentioned in here means the NVRAM on the Controller Board (PCB24). • "NVRAM" or EEPROM on the BiCU (PCB1) has nothing to do with this. •...
  • Page 90 Security Settings 3. Press [System Settings]. 4. Press [Settings for Administrator] > [Data Management] > [Auto Erase Memory Setting]. 5. From the list next to Auto Erase Memory Setting, select [On], and then select an erase method. The default erase method is [Random Numbers], and the default number of overwrites is [3].
  • Page 91 Security Settings Check the overwrite erase icon. The icon [1] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during overwriting. The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten. Icon This icon lights up when there is data to be overwritten, and flashes during overwriting.

  • Page 92: Hdd Encryption

    Security Settings 2.7.3 HDD ENCRYPTION Before You Begin the Procedure Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values. (1) Supervisor login password (2) Administrator login name (3) Administrator login password If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed before the installation procedure.
  • Page 93 Security Settings Turn ON the main power. Log in as the machine administrator from the operation panel. Press "Settings" icon > [System Settings]. Press [Settings for Administrator] > [File Management] > [Machine Data Encryption Settings]. Press [Encrypt]. If the data has been encrypted, you can decrypt the data, update the encryption Key, •...

  • Page 94: Backing Up The Encryption Key

    Security Settings encryption key. Press [OK]. When the confirmation dialog is displayed, press [OK]. 10. Press [ ], and then log out of the machine. 11. Turn OFF the main power, and then turn the main power back ON. The machine will start to convert the data on the memory after you turn ON the machine. Wait until the message "Memory conversion complete.

  • Page 95: Encryption Key Restoration

    Security Settings press [Exit]. If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Print] key. Print out the machine's data encryption key. Press [Exit]. Log out. Encryption Key Restoration How to restore the old encryption key to the machine The following message appears after the controller board (PCB24) is replaced. In such a case, it is necessary to restore the encryption key to the new controller board (PCB24).
  • Page 96 Security Settings If the encryption key backup has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up. The HDD will be formatted after the forced start-up. • Encrypted data will be deleted. • • User settings will be cleared. Prepare an SD card.

  • Page 97: Web Help Support" Settings

    "Web Help Support" Settings 2.8 "WEB HELP SUPPORT" SETTINGS 2.8.1 OVERVIEW The Web Help Support function is a feature that assists users on the operation panel. When a user encounters a problem when operating the machine, the solution is displayed on the operation panel, and users can attempt to resolve the problem by themselves.

  • Page 98: How To Enable/Disable Web Help Support

    "Web Help Support" Settings 2.8.2 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE WEB HELP SUPPORT This function is enabled by default. If the customer does not want to use this function, it can be disabled via UP or SP modes as follows: UP setting Enable machine administrator authentication and login as administrator.
  • Page 99 "Web Help Support" Settings Enable or disable Help Functions. If this function is disabled in SP mode(5-828-091(Network Setting Web)), the function in the UP setting menu will not be displayed. 2-53 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 100: Remoteconnect Support" Settings

    "RemoteConnect Support" Settings 2.9 "REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT" SETTINGS 2.9.1 OVERVIEW The RemoteConnect Support function allows monitoring and remote control of the customer’s machine’s operation panel. Allows the customer support operator to remotely connect with client's machine equipped • with the Smart Operation panel, or PC over the internet. •...
  • Page 101 "RemoteConnect Support" Settings Select "Application Settings". Select "Settings" in "RemoteSupportService" and check "Service availability". The application is enabled by default on machines produced from September • 2018. The setting is located in RemoteSupport Service. However, the name of the • settings menu is "RemoteConnect Support".
  • Page 102 "RemoteConnect Support" Settings "Check Status" menu or by pressing down on the status bar on the Smart Operation Panel for over five seconds. After pressing down for over five seconds, stop pressing on the panel and RemoteConnect Support will open. If setup was done correctly, four digits will be displayed on the panel.

  • Page 103: Uninstalling Remoteconnect Support

    "RemoteConnect Support" Settings 2.9.3 UNINSTALLING REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT Some customers might ask for this feature to be disabled because of security precautions. In many cases, disabling RemoteConnect Support should be sufficient. However, if a customer asks for RemoteConnect Support to be completely uninstalled, remove it by conducting the following procedure: Log in to Screen SP mode.

  • Page 104: Remote Panel Operation" Settings

    "Remote Panel Operation" Settings 2.10 "REMOTE PANEL OPERATION" SETTINGS 2.10.1 OVERVIEW Remote Panel Operation will be pre-installed in models that have Smart Operation Panel G2.5. This is a built-in function. Using Web Image Monitor, you can view on the computer screen the operation panels of devices on the same network as well as remotely control such devices.

  • Page 105: How To Enable/Disable Remote Panel Operation/Monitoring

    "Remote Panel Operation" Settings Click [Device Management] > [Remote Panel Operation] Notes • When connected by the Remote Panel Operation function, the machine does not automatically switch to Sleep mode, and the Auto Logout and System Auto Reset functions do not operate. You cannot connect to a single unit from multiple computers and operate it by the Remote •...

  • Page 106: Paper Feed Unit Pb1170(D3Gq-17)

    Paper Feed Unit PB1170(D3GQ-17) 2.11 PAPER FEED UNIT PB1170(D3GQ-17) 2.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Confirm that you have the accessories listed below. Description Q’ty EMC Address Name Plate Decal Paper Size/ Tray Number Decal CHN 10mm Decal CHN Date 40mm Joint bracket (Front left) Joint bracket (Front right) Joint bracket (Front center) Joint bracket (Frame)

  • Page 107: Installation Procedure

    Paper Feed Unit PB1170(D3GQ-17) 2.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur. Lifting the mainframe requires two or more people. The mainframe is highly unstable •...
  • Page 108 Paper Feed Unit PB1170(D3GQ-17) Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [A] and paper size decal [B] above and below the line [C] on each tray of the paper feed unit. Load paper into the paper tray(s) and set the side fences and end fence(s). Adjust the registration for each tray (Image Adjustment).

  • Page 109: Caster Table Type M41 (D3Gw03)

    Caster Table Type M41 (D3GW03) 2.12 CASTER TABLE TYPE M41 (D3GW03) 2.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Q’ty Remarks Positioning Pin Right Positioning Pin Left Joint Bracket A Fixing Screw Cap for a Handle Joint Bracket B 2.12.2 INSTALLATION CONDITIONS Possible configurations are as follows: Optional paper feed units Securing with Joint Bracket Not Required...

  • Page 110: Installation Procedure

    Caster Table Type M41 (D3GW03) 2.12.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Remove the handle [A] attached to the back of the caster table. Attach the handle [A] removed in step 1 to the screw holes on the front of the caster table. Fit the caps [A] in the screw hole of the handle. Attach two pins to the caster table.
  • Page 111 Caster Table Type M41 (D3GW03) Place the main machine [B] on the caster table [A]. Loosen the screws of the stabilizer [A] on the front side, lower the stabilizer until the machine is stable, and tighten the screws. Loosen the screws of the stabilizers on the left, right, and rear sides, lower the stabilizers, and tighten the screws.
  • Page 112 Caster Table Type M41 (D3GW03) Fit the caps [A] in the screw hole of the handle. Attach two pins to the caster table. Attach the long pin [A] to the right hole and the short pin [B] to the left hole. Attach the bracket [A] to the caster table.
  • Page 113 Caster Table Type M41 (D3GW03) Secure the caster table and optional paper feed unit with the screw [A]. Remove the rear cover [A] of the optional paper feed unit. 10. Secure the caster table and the 1st level of the optional paper feed unit with the two joint brackets [A].
  • Page 114 Caster Table Type M41 (D3GW03) 11. Secure the 1st level of the optional paper feed unit and the main machine with the two joint brackets [A]. Use the screws [B] on the main machine 12. Reattach the rear cover of the optional paper feed unit. 13.

  • Page 115: Remove The Handle [A] Attached To The Back Of The Caster Table

    Caster Table Type M41 (D3GW03) Remove the handle [A] attached to the back of the caster table. Attach the handle [A] removed in step 1 to the screw holes on the front of the caster table. Fit the caps [A] in the screw hole of the handle. Attach two pins to the caster table.
  • Page 116 Caster Table Type M41 (D3GW03) Attach the bracket [A] to the caster table. Place the optional paper feed units [B],[C] on the caster table [A]. Place the main machine [D] on the optional paper feed unit [C]. Pull out the paper feed tray. Secure the caster table and optional paper feed unit with the screw [A].
  • Page 117 Caster Table Type M41 (D3GW03) 10. Secure the caster table and the 2nd level of the optional paper feed unit with the two joint brackets [A]. 2-71 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 118 Caster Table Type M41 (D3GW03) 11. Secure the 1st and 2nd levels of the optional paper feed unit and the main machine with the four joint brackets [A]. Use the screws [B] on the main machine. Installing the caster table, optional paper feed unit (3nd level), and main machine Follow the same procedure when installing the 3rd level of the optional paper feed unit.When you do this, secure the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd levels of the optional paper feed unit and the main machine with six joint brackets [A].
  • Page 119 Caster Table Type M41 (D3GW03) 13. Loosen the screws of the stabilizer [A] on the front side, lower the stabilizer until the machine is stable, and tighten the screws. 14. Loosen the screws of the stabilizers on the left, right, and rear sides, lower the stabilizers, and tighten the screws.
  • Page 120 1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59) 2.13 1-BIN TRAY BN1040 (D574-59) 2.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty 1-Bin Tray Unit Tray Binding Screw (M3×6) Screw (M3×10) Grounding Plate Front Right Cover Left Upper Cover Right Upper Cover Rear Upper Cover...

  • Page 121: 1-Bin Tray Bn1040 (D574-59)

    1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59) 2.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur. Remove the left upper cover [A] . Remove the rear cover [A].
  • Page 122 1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59) Remove the front right cover [A] and the hinge cover [B]. Remove the scanner rear cover [A] and scanner rear small cover [B]. Release two screws and three tabs for attaching the relay board (PCB12) [A] and FFC, to release the FFC.
  • Page 123 1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59) Remove the FFC fixing bracket while turning it counterclockwise and releasing the tab. Release the clamp for fixing the I/F cable [A]. Remove the grounding plate [A].(This procedure is for IM C300 series/IM C400F) 2-77 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 124 1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59) Disconnect the FFC [A] from the relay board (PCB12). Disconnect the FFC for the relay board (PCB12) while pulling it out straight, because it does not have a lock mechanism. 10. Remove the harnesses and FFC from the scanner unit on the BiCU (PCB1) [A]. When lifting the scanner unit, move the harnesses out of the frame so that they do not interfere.

  • Page 125: Remove The Packaging Tapes On The 1-Bin Tray Unit

    1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59) 11. Remove the screws, and then remove the scanner unit [B] with the ADF [A]. Remove the Packaging tapes on the 1-bin tray unit. Attach the small frame [A]. 2-79 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 126 1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59) Attach the mounting frame [A]. Install the screws in this order: • Attach the 1-bin tray unit [A]. (M3x10: 4 screws, and M3×6: 1 binding screw [D]) Fasten the grounding wire [B] included in this kit with one screw as shown below. Fasten the other end of the grounding wire with the screw [C].
  • Page 127 1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59) Install the 1-bin tray [A]. Install the scanner unit [A] with the ADF. 2-81 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 128 1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59) When installing the scanner unit, make sure that the harnesses are not pinched between the scanner unit and the 1-bin tray unit . Attach the grounding plate [A] and clamp the harness [B] to the ADF. (Upper: blue screw ×1, Lower: M3x10 (existing)) Connect the relay board (PCB12) [A] and FFC [B].
  • Page 129 1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59) Attach the FFC fixing bracket [A]. 10. Attach the relay board (PCB12) [B] with the three hooks [A] on the FFC fixing bracket. 11. Attach the FFC with the screw [C]. 12. Set two ferrite cores [B] in the ferrite core holder [A] included in this kit. 13.
  • Page 130 1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59) 14. Route the FFC [A] in step 14 through one ferrite core [B] attached to the control box, and connect it to the BiCU (PCB1). The FFC should be routed under the USB cable. • Do not connect the FFC at an angle. Otherwise, the scanner unit may be •...
  • Page 131 1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59) 16. Attach the following items: Right rear cover [A] (from the accessories) • Rear upper cover [B] (from the accessories) • Left upper cover [C] (from the accessories, not the original cover) • 17. Attach the following items: Scanner rear small cover •...

  • Page 132: Page Keeper Type M28 (D3Dq-17)

    Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) 2.14 PAGE KEEPER TYPE M28 (D3DQ-17) This option is only for NA/EU. 2.14.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Q’ty Remark Double-feed sensor: Receiver (PCB15) Ground plate: Receiver Double-feed sensor: Emitter (PCB14) Ground plate: Emitter Tapping Screws: 3x10 Screw: M3x6 Harness: Receiver Long harness...

  • Page 133: Open The Adf Top Cover [A]

    Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Open the ADF top cover [A]. Remove the screw, and lift up the original tray [B]. Open the ADF [A], and release the five tabs of the ADF rear cover by using a thin screwdriver. 2-87 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 134 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Remove the ADF rear cover [A]. Close the ADF. Open the ADF top cover [A]. Remove the screw, and lift up the original tray [B]. Open the ADF, then release the three tabs of the ADF front cover [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 2-88...

  • Page 135: Slide The Shaft [A] Of The Original Feed Unit Toward The Rear To Remove It

    Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Close the ADF slightly, then remove the ADF front cover [A] while releasing the two tabs with a thin screwdriver. Slide the shaft [A] of the original feed unit toward the rear to remove it. Remove the ADF inner cover [A].(Pivot Screws x 2) •...
  • Page 136 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Remove the guide [A]. Put the grounding plate [A] on the double-feed sensor (MFTB) (PCB14) [B]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 2-90...

  • Page 137: Disconnect The Harness [A] Of The Adf Top Cover [B] From Adf Relay Board (Pcb13) (Cn5), And Release The Clamp

    Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Attach the double-feed sensor (MFTB) (PCB14) [A] and grounding plate [B] as a set. (Tapping screw: 3x10) Disconnect the harness [A] of the ADF top cover [B] from ADF relay board (PCB13) (CN5), and release the clamp. Remove the harness [A] from the harness guide.
  • Page 138 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Remove the ADF top cover [A].(Pivot Screw x 1) Remove the five screws and release the four tabs, and then remove the inner cover [A]. Attach the grounding plate [A] and the grounding wire [B], and insert the grounding wire in the notch.
  • Page 139 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Connect the long harness to the double-feed sensor (URRB) (PCB15) [A]. Attach the double-feed sensor (URRB) (PCB15) [A]. (Tapping screw: 3x10) Route the harnesses [B]. Reattach the inner cover ( x5), and then reattach the ADF top cover ( x1).

  • Page 140: Connect The Harness To The Connector Of The Double-Feed Sensor (Mftb) [A] And Adf Relay Board (Pcb13) [B] (Cn3), And Then Route It

    Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Attach the clamp while the top cover is open, and attach the ground wire while putting it on the guide (marked by the blue arrow). (Screw: M3x6) Connect the harness to the connector of the double-feed sensor (MFTB) [A] and ADF relay board (PCB13) [B] (CN3), and then route it.

  • Page 141: Connect The Power Cord And Turn On The Main Power

    Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Reattach the covers and original feed unit. When reattaching the ADF inner cover, make sure that the shaft [A] fits into the groove (this is the shaft of the lock lever for the friction pad on the back side of the cover). If the shaft does not fit, the ADF top cover will not be closed.

  • Page 142: Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21)

    Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) 2.15 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M12 (B870-21) 2.15.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Q’ty Counter interface board Harness Stud Clamp Harness band Screws (Not used) Screws (Not used) Caution Chart 2.15.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main •...
  • Page 143 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) Install the four studs [A] in the controller box. Install the key counter interface board [A] shown below on the four studs. Connect the harness included in this kit to the connector [A] on the interface board. Do the following steps: Route the harness through the rear of the interface board, and then connect it to •...
  • Page 144 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) interference with other harnesses. • Insert the clamp included in this kit at [C], and clamp the harness with the clamp to prevent interference with other harnesses. Remove the scanner rear cover [A] and scanner rear small cover [B]. Cut out the hole for the counter device cable to pass through the scanner rear cover [A].
  • Page 145 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) Reattach the scanner rear cover. Connect the harness from the counter device to CN4 [A] on the key counter interface board and route the harness. 10. Route the harness through the scanner rear cover [B] as shown below. 11.

  • Page 146: Nfc Card Reader Type M13 (D3Ac-21)

    NFC Card Reader Type M13 (D3AC-21) 2.16 NFC CARD READER TYPE M13 (D3AC-21) 2.16.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Q'ty Cable Cover USB Cable NFC Reader Ferrite Core Caution Chart EMC Address Fastener Decal Label • Two types of cable cover are included: [A]: For machines without the 1-Bin tray unit.
  • Page 147 NFC Card Reader Type M13 (D3AC-21) 2.16.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE This section includes the procedure for a machine that does not have the 1-Bin Tray Unit option. However, this procedure can be used for a machine that has a 1-Bin Tray Unit installed. •...
  • Page 148 NFC Card Reader Type M13 (D3AC-21) Make a loop with the USB cable of the NFC reader, and then attach the ferrite core [A]. Connect the USB cable to the operation panel. Attach the cover removed in step 3. Fit the cable into the slit [A] in the cover. •...
  • Page 149 NFC Card Reader Type M13 (D3AC-21) Attach the fasteners to the front side of the NFC reader . Attach the NFC reader [A] to the back side of the front right cover with adhesive tape. Attach the hinge cover [A]. Fit the cable into the slit.
  • Page 150 NFC Card Reader Type M13 (D3AC-21) Make sure that the harnesses are not pinched between the red dotted areas in the photos. 11. Push the USB cable into the covers. • Make sure that the cable fits in the slit [B]. 12.

  • Page 151: Accessory Check

    Anti-condensation Heater 2.17 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER 2.17.1 ACCESSORY CHECK All the accessories required to install the Anti-condensation Heater are available as the following parts. Order each part separately. Description Q'ty Part Number Junction Harness D1965265* Heater Power Switch 12042570 Clamp 11050511 Screw 08010231 Heater kit...
  • Page 152 Anti-condensation Heater • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur. Pull out the paper feed tray. Remove the front cover [A].
  • Page 153 Anti-condensation Heater Remove the cover [A]. Remove the rear cover [A]. Remove the bracket [A]. Remove the screws from the fan cover [B]. 2-107 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 154 Anti-condensation Heater Remove the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4) [A]. 10. Insert the heater harness into the hole [A]. 11. Fit the small bumps on the heater into the holes [B] to install the heater [C] ( (M3×6) × 1) Use a short screwdriver to secure the screw. 12.
  • Page 155 Anti-condensation Heater 13. Connect the connector [A] of junction harness to the connector of heater.( × 1) A: To the heater B: Not used C: To the optional PFU heater (if installed) D: To the PSU (PCB17) 14. Store the connector [A] with the connector of heater in the connector holder, then push the power switch [B] into the switch hole until you feel it click into place.
  • Page 156 Anti-condensation Heater 16. Connect the connector [A] shown in step 13 to CN600. 17. Connect the connector [B] in the holder [C].Do not attach the holder [C] to the PSU (PCB17), when the dehumidification heater will be installed D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 2-110...
  • Page 157 Anti-condensation Heater 18. When installing the dehumidification heater (PFU): Pull out the connector [A] and its harness to the lower part of the machine. Then uncap the connector isolation cap in the optional paper feed unit and connect the connector [A] to the uncapped connector. (Dehumidification Heater (PFU)) 19.

  • Page 158: Dehumidification Heater (Main Unit)

    Dehumidification Heater (main unit) 2.18 DEHUMIDIFICATION HEATER (MAIN UNIT) 2.18.1 ACCESSORY CHECK FOR IM C300 SERIES Items Q’ty Remarks See Note *2 Screw M4 x 6 A: Heater Kit Harness Heater Harness B: Harness Clamps A: Heater Kit Bracket C: Bracket Set...

  • Page 159: Accessory Check For Im C400 Series

    (PFU), and Anti-condensation Heater. If you have already ordered this harness for these heaters, it is not necessary to order this harness again at this time. 2.18.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR IM C300 SERIES Do not lift the machine with any optional paper feed units attached •...
  • Page 160 Dehumidification Heater (main unit) • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur. Do the following procedure to prevent the harnesses from being damaged. •...
  • Page 161 Dehumidification Heater (main unit) • A:For the dehumidification heater (H3) B:For the junction harness • C:Not used (For the isolation cap) • • D:Isolation cap The connector [C] is not used. Put the connector into the opening. • Put the mainframe on the table. Remove the upper left cover [A].
  • Page 162 Dehumidification Heater (main unit) Open the front cover and remove the left cover [A]. Remove the rear cover [A]. Remove the bracket [A]. 10. Remove the screws from the fan cover [B]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 2-116...
  • Page 163 Dehumidification Heater (main unit) 11. Remove the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4) [A]. 12. Remove the switch cover [A].(Hooks × 2) 13. Cut out the switch hole [A] in the switch cover. 14. Push the heater power switch to the switch cover. 15.
  • Page 164 Dehumidification Heater (main unit) Attach the rocker switch so that the white point [B] is on the upper side of the switch. A:Not used (For the drum heater: If installing the anti-condensation heater (H1)) • • B:For the locker switch C:For the heater harness •...
  • Page 165 Dehumidification Heater (main unit) 16. Connect the connector to CN600 [A] on the PSU (PCB17) and route the junction harness along the red dotted line in the photo. ( × 1) 17. Attach the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4). 18. Connect the junction harness [A] to the heater harness and route the junction harness along the red dotted line in the photo.

  • Page 166: Installation Procedure For Im C400 Series

    Dehumidification Heater (main unit) 21. Attach the securing bracket [A] at the left of the machine. ( × 2) 22. Attach the left cover. 23. Turn ON the switch[A]. 2.18.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR IM C400 SERIES • Installation Procedure for b/b-finisher Do not lift the machine with any optional paper feed units attached •...
  • Page 167 Dehumidification Heater (main unit) Pull out the waste toner bottle [A] Pull out the paper tray. Connect the connector of the junction harness to CN600 [A] on the PSU (PCB17). Connect the connector of the junction harness to the bracket [B]. Route the junction harness in the red dotted line in the photo.
  • Page 168 Dehumidification Heater (main unit) Slide the tray heater [A] to the paper feed unit and connect the heater harness [B] to the connector [C]. Attach the tray heater cover[A]. 10. Reassemble the machine. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 2-122...

  • Page 169: Dehumidification Heater (Pfu)

    Dehumidification Heater (PFU) 2.19 DEHUMIDIFICATION HEATER (PFU) 2.19.1 ACCESSORY CHECK There is no need to order individual kits. Part Number "D3GQ0400" for NA/TWN, "D3GQ0401" for EU/AA/KOR/CHN contains all required accessories to install the heater for the paper feed tray. After ordering "D3GQ0400", check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.

  • Page 170: Installation Procedure

    Dehumidification Heater (PFU) The following junction harness [A] (D1965265 / Accessory #4) is the same harness • that is supplied with the anti-condensation heater or dehumidification heater (main unit). So if you already have it, you can use it. 2.19.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket.
  • Page 171 Dehumidification Heater (PFU) Remove the left cover [A]. Remove the rear cover [A]. Remove the bracket [A]. Remove the screws form the fan cover [B]. Remove the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4) [A]. 2-125 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 172 Dehumidification Heater (PFU) Remove the switch cover [A]. (Hooks × 2) Cut out the switch hole [A] in the switch cover. 10. Push the heater power switch to the switch cover. 11. Connect the heater power switch to the connectors of the junction harness [A]. Attach the rocker switch so that the white point [B] is on the upper side of the switch.
  • Page 173 Dehumidification Heater (PFU) Store the connector [A] into the area as shown below, then attach the switch • cover. 12. Reattach the switch cover. 13. Connect the connector [A] to CN600 on the PSU (PCB17) and route the junction harness along the red dotted line in the photo.
  • Page 174 Dehumidification Heater (PFU) 14. Reattach the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4). Confirm the above connecters are connected to the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4) when • attaching the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4). 15. Slide in the tray heater [A], and pass the heater harness [B] through the square hole [C]. 16.
  • Page 175 Dehumidification Heater (PFU) 17. Connect the connector [A] to the tray heater connector (attached in step 15). 18. Connect the harness [B] to the junction harness (mainframe). 19. Attach two clamps [E] and route the harness through them. • A: For this tray heater •...

  • Page 176: For Installing The Tray Heater On The 2Nd Optional Paper Feed Unit

    Dehumidification Heater (PFU) 21. Turn ON the switch [A]. For Installing the Tray Heater on the 2nd Optional Paper Feed Unit Do the same procedure for the 1st optional paper feed unit from step 1 to step 19. Connect the harness [A] and heater connector for the 2nd tray. Remove the cap on the 1st tray harness and connect the 2nd tray harness [B].

  • Page 177: For Joining The Mainframe With The Optional Paper Feed Unit

    Dehumidification Heater (PFU) • A: To the 2nd tray heater B: To the 1st tray heater harness • C: Not used • • D: Cap Reattach all the covers removed. Turn ON the switch[A]. For Joining the Mainframe with the Optional Paper Feed Unit The mainframe and the optional paper feed unit should be joined with joint brackets after the dehumidification heater installation, because the heater harness might be damaged if the mainframe is accidentally removed.
  • Page 178 Dehumidification Heater (PFU) Remove the upper cover [A] of the paper feed unit. Remove the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit. Attach the joint bracket (frame) [C]. ( :Tapping × 1 [A], M3×6: × 1 [B]) Reattach the upper cover removed in step 1. Put the mainframe on the paper feed unit.
  • Page 179 Dehumidification Heater (PFU) Remove the left cover [B] of the mainframe. ( × 2) 1: Rear 2: Front 3: Left Join the mainframe with the optional paper feed unit with four joint brackets [A] (front right), [B] (front left) and [C] (rear) (×2). These brackets are secured with the following screws. 1: Front right 2: Left 3: Rear...

  • Page 180: Joining Two Optional Paper Feed Units

    Dehumidification Heater (PFU) [A]: M3×12 (included in this kit) [B]: M3×6 (included in this kit) [C] (Upper): Existing screws (×2) (Screws remove in step 7) [C] (Lower): M3×6 (included in this kit) 10. Reassemble the mainframe and the paper feed unit. Joining Two Optional Paper Feed Units Attach the joint bracket (front center) [A] to the 2nd paper feed unit that will be installed at the lowest position.
  • Page 181 Dehumidification Heater (PFU) Join the two paper feed units with two joint brackets (rear) [A] and one screw [B]. (M3×6: × 3 (included in this kit)) 1: Rear 2: Front center Bend and cut off the back cover tab [A] of the upper optional paper feed unit before attaching it.
  • Page 182 Dehumidification Heater (PFU) Do not lift the machine with any optional paper feed units attached. • If the machine already has one or more optional paper feed unit(s) attached, be sure to disconnect the machine and paper feed unit(s), and lift them up separately when moving/transporting.

  • Page 183: Controller Options

    Controller Options 2.20 CONTROLLER OPTIONS 2.20.1 OVERVIEW Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before • you handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards. This machine has I/F card slots for optional I/F connections and SD card slots applications. After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it (See Check All at the end of this section).

  • Page 184: Ieee 1284 Interface Board Type M19 (D3C0-17)

    Controller Options 2.20.2 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE M19 (D3C0-17) Component Check Description Remarks IEEE 1284 Interface Board FCC document Notes for users Installation Procedure • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur.

  • Page 185: File Format Converter Type M19 (D3Br-04)

    Controller Options Install the interface board [A] into the slot. (Knob-screw × 2 [B]) When inserting into the slot, push the interface board until it is inserted properly. Turn ON the power. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see Check All Connections at the end of this section).

  • Page 186: Installation Procedure

    Controller Options Installation Procedure Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main • power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur. Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury. •...

  • Page 187: Ieee 802.11A/G/N Interface Unit Type M19 (D3Br-01)

    Controller Options Plug in and turn ON the main power switch. Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below. SP No. Title Setting SP5-836-001 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) "1" SP5-836-002 Panel Setting "0" Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see Check All Connections at the end of this section).

  • Page 188: Installation Procedure

    Controller Options Installation Procedure Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket.If the main • power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur. • Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury. Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the •...
  • Page 189 Controller Options Installing the antennae Peel off the double-sided tapes on the hook and loop fasteners [A], and then attach them [A] to the antennae. Attach the fasteners to the lower half of the antennae (The side of cable). You can attach the fasteners to either side of the antenna. Attach "ANT1"...

  • Page 190: User Tool Settings For Wireless Lan

    Controller Options User Tool Settings for Wireless LAN Enter the UP mode. Follow the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 802.11a/g/n. These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on. • You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet. Press the "Settings"...

  • Page 191: Sp Mode And Up Mode Settings For Ieee 802.11A/G/N

    Controller Options operation panel. Press "Restore Factory Defaults" to initialize the following settings: Transmission mode • • Channel • SSID • WEP Key • SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11a/g/n The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11a/g/n: SP No.

  • Page 192: Installation Procedure

    Controller Options • An Ethernet cable is not included with this option. Installation Procedure Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main • power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur. •...
  • Page 193 Controller Options inch) [A] from each end of the cable. Only for installing this option in North America, bind both cores with cable ties [A] as shown below. Insert the Ethernet cable [A] into the Ethernet port on this option. Insert the other end of the Ethernet cable to a PC for network setting.

  • Page 194: What Do The Led Indications Mean

    Controller Options Confirm that “Optional Network” is displayed in the setting on the operation panel at the location shown below. Location : [System Settings] > [Network/Interface]> [Optional Network] On the Web Image Monitor, “Optional Network” can be found at the following •...

  • Page 195: Ip Address Setting

    Controller Options IP Address Setting This section describes how to set an IP address on this option manually. Not only can you set an IP address on the same network segment, but it is also possible to set an IP address on a different network segment to share a single printer with devices in multiple networks.

  • Page 196: Enhanced Security Hdd Option Type M10 (D792-09)

    Controller Options Set the IP address, Subnet mask and Default Gateway specified by the customer. 2.20.6 ENHANCED SECURITY HDD OPTION TYPE M10 (D792-09) Accessory Check Description Q’ty Enhanced Security HDD EMC Address D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 2-150...

  • Page 197: Installation Procedure

    Controller Options Installation Procedure Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main • power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur. When the MFP is already in use (not a new machine) and “Data Encryption Settings” is •...
  • Page 198 Controller Options Remove the enhanced security HDD from its protective pack. Connect the two cables to the enhanced security HDD. ( × 2) Fasten the HDD to the bracket. ( × 4) Install the HDD bracket in the mainframe. ( ×...

  • Page 199: After Installing The Hdd

    Controller Options After Installing the HDD Connect the power cord and turn the machine on. A message prompts you to format the hard disk. Touch [Format]. Wait for the machine to finish formatting the hard disk. Do not touch the power switch while the hard disk format is in progress. Wait for •...
  • Page 200 Controller Options SP descriptions • SP5-853-001 (Stamp Date Download) Downloads the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the hard disk. Then these stamps can be used by the Settings menu. If this is not done, the user will not have access to the fixed stamps ("Confidential", "Secret", etc.).

  • Page 201: Sd Card Options

    SD Card Options 2.21 SD CARD OPTIONS 2.21.1 SD CARD APPLI MOVE Overview There are only two SD card slots (one is a service slot), so only two SD card applications can be used simultaneously. However, if multiple SD card applications are merged, three or more SD card options can be used.
  • Page 202 SD Card Options Remove the cover [A]. (hook × 1) Insert the SD card into either socket [A] or [B]. SMC Sheet Storage Location Open the ADF. Remove the platen sheet [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 2-156...

  • Page 203: Move Exec

    SD Card Options Store the SMC sheet on the red dotted area [A] as shown below . Reattach the platen sheet. The original application SD card should be kept in a safe place, for the following reasons: • The SD card is the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application. •...

  • Page 204: Undo Exec

    SD Card Options Follow the messages shown on the operation panel. Turn OFF the power. 10. Remove the source SD card from SD card slot 2 (lower). 11. Attach the slot cover. 12. Turn ON the power. 13. Check that the application programs run properly. 14.

  • Page 205: Ocr Unit Type M13 (D3Ac-23, -24, -25)

    SD Card Options 2.21.2 OCR UNIT TYPE M13 (D3AC-23, -24, -25) Component Check Description Q’ty SD Card Searchable PDF Function Outline This option adds a searchable PDF function to the scanning function. The searchable PDF function performs OCR by the MFP on a document read with the •...
  • Page 206 SD Card Options Remove the SD card slot cover [A] from the SD card slots. Insert the SD card in SD slot 1 (upper) with its label face to the front of the machine. Turn ON the power. Enter the SP mode, and then press “Enter” in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR Dictionary).

  • Page 207: Recovery Procedure

    SD Card Options 12. Press [Send File Type / Name]. 13. Check if [OCR Settings] is displayed on the [Send File Type / Name] screen. After installation, the OCR setting can be changed on the "OCR setting" screen. • • When setting up OCR, set [OCR setting] to [Yes].

  • Page 208: Order And Reinstall A New Sd Card (Service Part)

    SD Card Options Order and reinstall a new SD card (service part). Perform reinstallation in the same way as installation. • 2.21.3 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE M19 (D3BS-03) Overview The machine’s hard disk stores all document data from the Copier, Printer, and Scanner functions.

  • Page 209: Seal Check And Removal

    SD Card Options Supervisor login password • • Administrator login name Administrator login password • If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed before the installation procedure. Make sure that “Admin. Authentication” is ON. [Settings] >...

  • Page 210: Installation Procedure

    SD Card Options The surface of the tape must be blank. If you see "VOID" on the tape, do not install the • components of the box. If the tape surface does not show “VOID”, remove them from the corners of the box. You can see the “VOID”...

  • Page 211: Configuring "Auto Erase Memory" (Performed By The Customer)

    SD Card Options SP5-832-001 (HDD Formatting (ALL)) • • SP5-832-002 (HDD Formatting (IMH)) Set SP5-836-001 (Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)) to a value of 0 (disabled). Exit the SP mode. Print out the System Settings List and make sure that the option was installed successfully.(see "Check All Connections"...

  • Page 212: Installation Procedure

    SD Card Options Installation Procedure Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main • power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]. Insert the SD card (PictBridge) in SD slot 1 (upper) with its label face to the front of the machine.

  • Page 213: Component Check

    SD Card Options Refer to "PS3/PDF Direct Emulation (Clone PS)" for detailed functions of Adobe PS3/PDF and PS3/PDF Direct Emulation Component Check Description Q’ty SD Card PS3 Decal Installation Procedure (Adobe PS) • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur.

  • Page 214: Initial Settings For The Printer Driver

    SD Card Options Stick the "Adobe PostScript3" decal [A] on the front face of the MFP. Turn ON the power. Attach the SD card slot cover. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option. (see Check All Connections at the end of this section) Note that the description of Firmware Version shown in the printed Configuration Page •...

  • Page 215: Switching Back To Clone Ps From Adobe Ps

    SD Card Options Setting items (Mac OS X): If the driver is installed through the Bonjour function or “HP Jetdirect - Socket”, the settings will be automatically configured. Automatic configuration will not work if any other protocol is used for installation. In this case, manual configuration is required.

  • Page 216: Xps Direct Print Option Type M41 (D0Cj-02, -20)

    SD Card Options 2.21.6 XPS DIRECT PRINT OPTION TYPE M41 (D0CJ-02, -20) Component Check Description Q'ty Remarks XPS Direct Print SD Card Installation Procedure • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur.

  • Page 217: Vm Card Type M37

    SD Card Options 2.21.7 VM CARD TYPE M37 Component Check Description Q’ty Remarks SD Card Installation Procedure Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main • power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur. •...
  • Page 218 SD Card Options Insert the VM Card in SD card slot 2 [A: Lower Slot]. Reattach the SD card slot cover. Turn ON the main power. Print out the "Configuration Page", and then check if this option is correctly recognized.(see "Check All Connections"...

  • Page 219: Check All Connections

    Check All Connections 2.22 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS Plug in the power cord. Turn ON the main power. Print the configuration page. [Settings] > [Printer Settings] > [List/Test Prints] > [Machine Information] > [Configuration Page] All installed options are shown in the "System Reference" column. 2-173 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 220: Instructions For The Customers

    Instructions for the Customers 2.23 INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CUSTOMERS Please explain the following points to customers when installing the machine. These items are explained in more detail in the operating instructions. How to add paper to the paper feed unit and the by-pass feed unit. •...
  • Page 221 Instructions for the Customers Select the color that you want to replace, then click 2-175 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 223: Preventive Maintenance

    PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE...

  • Page 225: Maintenance Tables

    Maintenance Tables 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES See "Appendices" for the following information: Maintenance Tables • D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 226: Pm/Yield Parts Settings

    PM/Yield Parts Settings 3.2 PM/YIELD PARTS SETTINGS 3.2.1 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE OF THE PM/YIELD PARTS There are two ways to reset the PM counter for this machine. • Method 1: Reset by SP3-701 (New Unit Detection). This is the conventional method Method 2: Reset by [PM Counter / New Unit Set] Menu •...
  • Page 227 PM/Yield Parts Settings 3.Press [EXECUTE] to output the PM counter list. 4. Press [Exit]. In the SMC data, check the values of the counters in SP7-621-002 to 208, to determine what parts should be replaced. (Refer to the SP table in the appendix.) Set the following SPs (New Unit Detection) to "1"...

  • Page 228: Method 2: By [Pm Counter / New Unit Set] Menu

    PM/Yield Parts Settings Item Separation roller:SP3-701-160 Paper feed tray (Tray 2) Feed roller: SP3-701-150 Friction pad: SP3-701-151 Paper feed tray (Tray 3) Feed roller: SP3-701-153 Friction pad: SP3-701-154 Paper feed tray (Tray 4) Feed roller: SP3-701-156 Friction pad: SP3-701-157 Bypass feed roller SP3-701-169 The PCDU and fusing unit detect a new unit automatically.
  • Page 229 PM/Yield Parts Settings 3. Press [EXECUTE] to output the PM counter list. 4. Press [Exit]. In the SMC data, check the values of the counters in SP 7-621-002 to 208, to determine what parts should be replaced. (Refer to the SP table in the appendix.) In the SP mode menu, press [PM Counter / New Unit Set].

  • Page 230: After Installing The New Pm Parts

    PM/Yield Parts Settings Press [All PM Parts List : New Unit Set]. Set the PM part that you want to replace to "YES" under "New Unit Set". After pressing "YES", the [Exit] key will not be available. Turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord. Replace the PM parts and turn ON the power.
  • Page 231 PM/Yield Parts Settings 2. Press [Counterlist print out]. 3. Press [EXECUTE] to output the PM counter list. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 232: Preparation Before Operation Check

    PM/Yield Parts Settings 3.2.3 PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION CHECK Execute Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) and Forced Line Position Adjustment before operation check. Execute Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) by referring to "Automatic Color Calibration (ACC)" section. Exit the User Tools mode, and then enter the SP mode. Do the "Forced line position adjustment"...

  • Page 233: Replacement And Adjustment

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT...

  • Page 235: Notes On The Main Power Switch (Sw1)

    Notes on the Main Power Switch (SW1) 4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 4.1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH (SW1) 4.1.1 PUSH SWITCH The main power button of this machine has been changed to a push-button switch from the conventional rocker switch. The push switch has characteristics and specifications different from the rocker switch.

  • Page 236: Shutdown Method

    Notes on the Main Power Switch (SW1) the main power switch (SW1), the machine will start automatically and the moving parts will begin to move. When working on moving parts, be careful that fingers or clothes do not get caught. •...
  • Page 237 Notes on the Main Power Switch (SW1) • Forced shutdown may damage the hard disk and memory, and can cause damage to the machine. Use a forced shutdown only if it is unavoidable. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 238: Beforehand

    Beforehand 4.2 BEFOREHAND Before installing options, please do the following: • If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list. If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer. Turn OFF the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the network cable.

  • Page 239: Special Tools

    Special Tools 4.3 SPECIAL TOOLS 4.3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS Item Part Description Q'ty Unique or Usage Number Common VSST9003 C5Y Color Chart C(General) For checking the image quality (2SHEETS/3 sets) * C4019503 20× Magnification C(General) For checking the image quality Scope B6455030 SD Card 2GB...

  • Page 240: Where To Apply Noise-Reduction Grease

    Special Tools 4.3.2 WHERE TO APPLY NOISE-REDUCTION GREASE • When applying grease, You can use both MOLYKOTE G-1077 GREASE and MOLYKOTE EM-50L. Apply grease on the spots indicated in red in the photos and diagrams. • Drive: Fusing Drive Unit Drive Unit Fusing Drive Gear Lubrication parts Lubrication spots...

  • Page 241: Drive: Transport Drive Unit: Im C300 Series

    The Images of the maximum amount [A] and minimum amount [B] • Drive Unit Fusing Drive Gear • Drive Unit Fusing Drive Brackets Drive: Transport Drive Unit: IM C300 series Description Description Transport Gear 01 Transport Gear 04 Transport Gear 02...
  • Page 242 Special Tools Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 4 studs 4 spots 4 sliding parts 4 spots Do NOT apply grease on the tips of the studs. Output Gear 01 • Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 1 gear 1 spot Output Gear 02 •...
  • Page 243 Special Tools Transport Gear 01 [A] • Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 1 gear 4 spots Transport Gear 02 [B] • Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 1 gear 4 spots Transport Gear 03 [C] • Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 1 gear 4 spots Transport Gear 04 [D] •...
  • Page 244 Special Tools Registration Clutch (CL8) [E] • Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 1 clutch 2 spots Maximum minimum 0.04g 0.008g The Images of the maximum amount [A] and minimum amount [B] • Transport Drive Bracket D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-10...
  • Page 245 Special Tools Output Gear 01 • • Output Gear 02 • Paper Feed Roller Axis 4-11 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 246 Special Tools Transport Gear 01 [A] • Transport Gear 02 [B] • Transport Gear 03 [C] • D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-12...

  • Page 247: Drive: Transport Drive Unit: Im C400 Series

    Special Tools Transport Gear 04 [D] • • Registration Clutch (CL8) [E] Drive: Transport Drive Unit: IM C400 series Description Description Transport Gear 01 Transport Gear 05 Transport Gear 02 Vertical Transport Gear 01 Transport Gear 03 Vertical Transport Gear 02 Transport Gear 04 Transport Drive Bracket Lubrication parts...
  • Page 248 Special Tools Do NOT apply grease on the tips of the studs. Apply grease in the range indicated in red in the following diagram. [A] The area 0-10 mm from the stepped part of the stud • • [B] The area 0-10 mm from the groove of the stud [C] The area 0-10 mm from the groove of the stud •...
  • Page 249 Special Tools Transport Gear 02 • Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 1 gear 4 spot Transport Gear 03 • Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 1 gear 2 spot Transport Gear 04 • Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 1 gear 3 spots Transport Gear 05 •...
  • Page 250 Special Tools Vertical Transport Gear 01 • Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 1 gear 1 spots • Vertical Transport Gear 02 Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 1 gear 1 spots Maximum minimum 0.04g 0.008g The Images of the maximum amount [A] and minimum amount [B] D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-16...
  • Page 251 Special Tools Transport Drive Bracket • • Transport Gear 01 • Transport Gear 02 4-17 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 252 Special Tools Transport Gear 03 • Transport Gear 04 • Transport Gear 05 • D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-18...

  • Page 253: Scanner: Scanner Motor: Gear

    Special Tools Vertical Transport Gear 01 • • Vertical Transport Gear 02 Scanner: Scanner Motor: Gear Timing Belt Gear [A] Reduction Gear [B] • Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 2 gears 5 spots 4-19 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 254 Special Tools Maximum minimum 0.0125g 0.0025g The Images of the maximum amount [A] and minimum amount [B] Timing Belt Gear • Reduction Gear • Scan 5 times to check if the scanner unit works properly, after applying grease. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-20...

  • Page 255: Tonner: Toner Supply Motor: Gear

    Special Tools Tonner: Toner Supply Motor: Gear Idler Gear [A] Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 1 gear 3 spots Maximum minimum 0.085g 0.0065g The Images of the maximum amount [A] and minimum amount [B] Idler Gear • 4-21 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 256: Paper Exit: Paper Exit Drive Unit

    Special Tools Paper Exit: Paper Exit Drive Unit Studs Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 4 studs 6 spots Description Description Paper Exit Drive Unit Stud 01 Paper Exit Drive Unit Stud 03 Paper Exit Drive Unit Stud 02 Paper Exit Drive Unit Stud 04 Gears •...
  • Page 257 Special Tools Description Description Paper Exit Drive Gear 01 Paper Exit Idler Gear 02 Paper Exit Drive Gear 02 Paper Exit Idler Gear 03 Paper Exit Drive Gear 03 Paper Exit Idler Gear 04 Paper Exit Idler Gear 01 Paper Exit Unit Guide •...
  • Page 258 Special Tools Junction Gate • Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 2 tips of the junction gate 2 spots • Junction Gate Lever Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 1 lever 1 spot D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-24...
  • Page 259 Special Tools Maximum minimum 0.6193g 0.0774g The Images of the maximum amount [A] and minimum amount [B] Paper Exit Drive Unit Stud 01 • • Paper Exit Drive Unit Stud 02 • Paper Exit Drive Unit Stud 03 Paper Exit Drive Unit Stud 04 •...
  • Page 260 Special Tools Paper Exit Drive Gear 02 • Paper Exit Drive Gear 03 • Paper Exit Idler Gear 01 • D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-26...
  • Page 261 Special Tools Paper Exit Idler Gear 02 • • Paper Exit Idler Gear 03 • Paper Exit Idler Gear 04 4-27 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 262 Special Tools Paper Exit Unit Guide • Junction Gate • Junction Gate Lever • D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-28...

  • Page 263: 1Bin: Drive Unit: Gear

    Special Tools 1Bin: Drive Unit: Gear 1Bin Drive Unit Bracket [A] Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 4 studs 4 spots 1Bin Drive Unit Gear 01 [A] • 1Bin Drive Unit Gear 02 [B] • Lubrication parts Lubrication spots 2 gears 6 spots 4-29 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 264 Special Tools D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-30...

  • Page 265: Exterior Covers

    Exterior Covers 4.4 EXTERIOR COVERS 4.4.1 FRONT COVER IM C300 series/IM C400F Pull out the paper tray. Remove the front lower cover [A] Open the front cover. 4-31 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 266: Im C400Srf

    Exterior Covers Remove the front cover [A] (pins × 2) IM C400SRF Pull out the paper tray. Remove the front lower cover [A] Open the front cover. Unhook the belt’s tip and detach the belt [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-32...

  • Page 267: Upper Left Cover

    Exterior Covers Remove the front cover [B] 4.4.2 UPPER LEFT COVER Remove the upper left cover [A]. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF 4-33 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 268: Left Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.4.3 LEFT COVER Remove the upper left cover (Upper Left Cover) Pull out the paper tray. Open the front cover and remove the left cover [A]. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-34...

  • Page 269: Rear Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.4.4 REAR COVER Remove the rear cover [A]. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF 4.4.5 RIGHT REAR COVER Open the right cover. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF 4-35 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 270 Exterior Covers Remove the right rear cover [A] IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF • Remove the right rear cover while pushing it downward. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-36...

  • Page 271: Paper Exit Tray

    Exterior Covers 4.4.6 PAPER EXIT TRAY Paper Exit Tray for IM C300 series/IM C400F Open the front cover. Remove the paper exit tray [A]. Paper Exit Front Cover/Paper Exit Upper Cover/Paper Exit Tray for IM C400SRF The following procedure for finisher model below includes steps to remove the paper exit front cover and the paper exit upper cover.

  • Page 272: Scanner Inner Cover

    Exterior Covers Remove the paper exit tray [A]. 4.4.7 SCANNER INNER COVER IM C300 series/IM C400F Remove the ADF and scanner unit. (Scanner Unit with the ADF) Remove the operation panel. (Operation Panel) Remove the cover [A] under the operation panel.
  • Page 273 Exterior Covers Remove the bracket [A]. Disconnect the harnesses [B] to remove the inner cover [A]. 4-39 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 274: Im C400Srf

    Exterior Covers Remove the scanner inner cover [A]. IM C400SRF Remove the ADF and scanner unit (Scanner Unit with the ADF) Remove the operation panel (Operation Panel) Remove the paper exit front cover[A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-40...
  • Page 275 Exterior Covers Remove the bracket [A]. Disconnect the harnesses [B] to remove the inner cover [A]. 4-41 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 276 Exterior Covers Remove the scanner inner cover [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-42...

  • Page 277: Ozone Filter

    Exterior Covers 4.4.8 OZONE FILTER Remove the filter cover [A]. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF Remove the ozone filter [A] from the filter cover. 4-43 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 278: Rear Bottom Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.4.9 REAR BOTTOM COVER This procedure is for IM C400SRF. Remove the rear bottom cover[A]. 4.4.10 RIGHT BOTTOM COVER These procedures are for IM C400SRF. Remove the front lower cover. Remove the right rear cover.(Right Rear Cover) Remove the right bottom cover[A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-44...

  • Page 279: Operation Panel

    Operation Panel 4.5 OPERATION PANEL The replacement procedures for the other parts are included in the FSM for the Smart Operation Panel, because these parts are also used with other models. 4.5.1 OPERATION PANEL Open the right cover. Remove the front right cover [A] and hinge cover [B]. Remove the screws fixing the operation panel [A].
  • Page 280 Operation Panel • Spread a cloth or service mat [A] on the paper exit tray to protect the display. Place the operation panel on the paper exit tray so that the display faces down. Remove the small rear cover [A]. Remove the harness guide[A].

  • Page 281: Check Before Installing The New Operation Panel

    Operation Panel Remove the rear cover [A]. Remove the hinge base cover [A]. Remove the hinge base [A]. Check before Installing the New Operation Panel There is a DIP switch [A] on the sub board in the operation panel unit. 4-47 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 282 Operation Panel The switch setting to use depends on the model. For the IM C300/C400 series, make sure that switches 1,3 and 6 are ON. Otherwise, SC672-11 occurs when starting the machine. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-48...

  • Page 283: Internal Parts

    Operation Panel 4.5.2 INTERNAL PARTS Refer to the FSM for the Smart Operation Panel. 4-49 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 284: Adf

    (Rear Cover) Remove the scanner rear cover [A] and scanner rear small cover [B]. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF Remove the rear upper cover [C] for IM C400SRF. Release the two screws and three tabs for attaching the relay board (PCB12) [A] and FFC to release the FFC.
  • Page 285 Remove the FFC fixing bracket [A] on the back side of the FFC. Remove the FFC fixing bracket while turning it counterclockwise and releasing the tab. Disconnect the harness [A] from the ADF. 4-51 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 286: When Installing The Adf

    Disconnect the FFC [A] from the relay board (PCB12). Disconnect the FFC for the relay board (PCB12) by pulling it out straight, because it does not have a lock mechanism. When reassembling, the FFC must be connected straight. Remove the shoulder screw for fixing the ADF. Remove the ADF unit [A] from the machine.

  • Page 287: Adjustment After Adf Unit Replacement

    Align the platen sheet with hook and loop fastener [C], with the rear left corner [B] on • the exposure glass as a reference. Close the ADF. Reopen the ADF. Press the surface of the platen sheet gently to fix it on the ADF firmly. Adjustment after ADF Unit Replacement "Adjustment after CIS Unit Replacement".

  • Page 288: Adf

    Open the ADF [A], and release the five tabs of the ADF rear cover by using a thin screwdriver. Remove the ADF rear cover [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-54...
  • Page 289 4.6.3 ADF FRONT COVER Open the ADF top cover [A]. Remove the screw, and lift up the original tray [B]. Open the ADF, then release the three tabs of the ADF front cover [A]. Close the ADF slightly, then remove the ADF front cover [A] while releasing the two tabs with a thin screwdriver.

  • Page 290: Original Feed Unit

    4.6.4 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT Open the ADF top cover. Slide the shaft [A] of the original feed unit toward the rear to remove it. 4.6.5 PICKUP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER Before replacing the pickup roller and feed roller, reset the PM counter. Turn the power ON.

  • Page 291: Original Feed Unit

    Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the pickup roller [B]. Remove the original feed unit. ( Original Feed Unit Remove the clip [A]. Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the pin [B]. 4-57 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 292: Adf Friction Pad

    Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the feed roller [B]. 4.6.6 ADF FRICTION PAD Before replacing the friction pad, reset the PM counter. Turn the power ON. Reset the PM counter. (Refer to Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts) Turn the power OFF.

  • Page 293: Adf Relay Board (Pcb13)

    4.6.7 ADF RELAY BOARD (PCB13) Remove the ADF rear cover. (ADF Rear Cover) Remove the ADF relay board (PCB13) [A] while releasing the hook. 4.6.8 ADF TOP COVER SET SENSOR (S23), ORIGINAL SET SENSOR (S22) Remove the ADF front cover (ADF Front Cover) Remove the top cover set sensor (S23) [A].

  • Page 294: Adf Motor (M8)

    4.6.9 ADF MOTOR (M8) Remove the ADF rear cover. (ADF Rear Cover) Remove the ADF motor (M8). 4.6.10 ORIGINAL FEED CLUTCH (CL4) Remove the ADF front cover. (ADF Front Cover) Release the hook while swinging up the original tray [A], and then remove the harness guide [B].

  • Page 295: Adf Registration Sensor (S24)

    4.6.11 ADF REGISTRATION SENSOR (S24) Remove the ADF front cover. (ADF Front Cover) Open the ADF [A]. Slide the hook [B], and then remove Scanning guide plate (front side) [C]. Remove the ADF registration sensor holder [A]. Remove the ADF registration sensor (S24) [A] from the holder. 4-61 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 296: Original Feed Sensor (S25)

    4.6.12 ORIGINAL FEED SENSOR (S25) Remove the ADF rear cover. (ADF Rear Cover) Disconnect the harness [A] from the ADF top cover [B], and release the clamp. Remove the harness [A] from the harness guide. Remove the ADF top cover [A].(Pivot screw × 1) D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-62...
  • Page 297 Remove the five screws and release the four tabs, and then remove the inner cover [A]. Remove the original feed sensor (S25) [A]. • When reattaching the ADF top cover, make sure it is set correctly so that the two tabs fit into the holes.

  • Page 298: Cis Unit (S21)

    4.6.13 CIS UNIT (S21) Remove the following parts • ADF Rear Cover • ADF Front Cover Original Feed Unit • Remove the ADF inner cover [A].(Pivot Screws × 2) Lift the back of the ADF inner cover [A] while swinging up the original tray [B], and then slide the ADF inner cover toward the back of the ADF unit.
  • Page 299 Disconnect the FFC [A]. Release the hook while swinging up the original tray [A], and then remove the harness guide [B]. Remove the gear bracket [A]. Remove the two gears [A]. Do not remove the gear [B], to prevent the inner pin [C] from dropping into the machine. 4-65 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 300 Open the ADF unit [A] while holding the gear [B] by hand. Open the scanning guide plate (rear side) [C] by pulling the release lever [D]. • Hold the gear [B]. It is not fixed, and may drop into the machine. Open the scanning guide plate (rear side) [C] before replacing the CIS unit.

  • Page 301: Adjustment After Cis Unit Replacement

    When reattaching the ADF inner cover [A], move it under the coupling shaft (marked by the dashed circle) of the original feed unit, and then you can install the ADF inner cover correctly. Adjustment after CIS Unit Replacement Correct the color deviation of the CIS (S21) after replacing the ADF unit or CIS unit. Perform the registration adjustment of the ADF (back side).
  • Page 302 Turn over the ACC test pattern [A] and set it on the ADF. (Set the arrow position of the test pattern in accordance with the arrow position of the photograph below.) Exit the User Tools mode, and then enter the SP mode. Execute SP4-482-001 (Read/Restore Std: Rear: Read New Chart).
  • Page 303 The causes of the failure may be as follows. • The test pattern was not set correctly. • A jam occurred at the time of reading. The ACC test pattern is abnormal (e.g. a pattern is missing). • The reading position has deviated (4mm or more) due to skewing for example. •...

  • Page 304: Scanner

    (ADF Unit) Remove the grounding plate [A]. Disconnect the harnesses and FFC from the scanner unit. When lifting the scanner unit, move the harnesses out of the frame so that they do not interfere. IM C300 series/IM C400F D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-70...
  • Page 305 Scanner IM C400SRF When disconnecting or connecting the FFC, push the lock button to unlock it as • shown below. If the FFC is not connected correctly, SC101 may occur. • 4-71 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 306: Scanner Unit With The Adf

    Scanner Remove the scanner unit [A]. 4.7.2 SCANNER UNIT WITH THE ADF Remove the following parts Rear Cover • • Right Rear Cover • Upper Left Cover Remove the front right cover [A] and the hinge cover [B]. Remove the scanner rear cover [A] and scanner rear small cover [B]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-72...
  • Page 307 Scanner IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF Remove the rear upper cover [C] for IM C400SRF. Release two screws and three tabs for attaching the relay board (PCB12) [A] and FFC, to release the FFC. 4-73 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 308 Scanner Remove the FFC fixing bracket [A] on the back side of the FFC. Remove the FFC fixing bracket while turning it counterclockwise and releasing the tab. Release the clamp for the harness [A] to the ADF. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-74...
  • Page 309 Scanner Remove the grounding plate [A].(This procedure is for IM C300 series/IM C400F) Disconnect the FFC [A] from the relay board (PCB12). Disconnect the FFC for relay board (PCB12) by pulling it out straight, because it does not have a lock mechanism.
  • Page 310 Scanner IM C400SRF When disconnecting or connecting the FFC, push the lock button to unlock it as shown below. If the FFC is not connected correctly, SC101 may occur. 10. Remove the scanner unit [B] with the ADF [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-76...

  • Page 311: Scanner

    Scanner 4.7.3 SCANNER FRONT COVER Remove the front right cover [A] and the hinge cover [B] . Open the ADF. Remove the scanner front cover [A]. Use a short screwdriver. 4-77 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 312: Adf Position Sensor (S19)

    Scanner There are five tabs on the back of the scanner front cover. 4.7.4 ADF POSITION SENSOR (S19) Remove the scanner unit. (Scanner Unit) Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover) Remove the scanner upper cover [A]. Remove the ADF position sensor (S19) [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-78...

  • Page 313: Scanner Hp Sensor (S20)

    Scanner 4.7.5 SCANNER HP SENSOR (S20) Remove the ADF unit. (ADF Unit) Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover) Remove the scanner upper cover [A]. Move the scanner carriage to the right. • To move the carriage, hold the carriage belt and move it carefully. •...

  • Page 314: Scanner Motor (M7)

    Scanner Remove the scanner HP sensor (S20) [B] while lifting up the bracket [A] slightly. 4.7.6 SCANNER MOTOR (M7) Remove the ADF unit. (ADF Unit) Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover) Remove the scanner upper cover [A]. Remove the shield plate [A]. ( ×...

  • Page 315: Scanner Carriage

    Scanner Remove the scanner motor (M7) with the bracket [A]. ( × 3, belt × 1) Remove the scanner motor (M7) [A]. ( × 1, × 2) 4.7.7 SCANNER CARRIAGE Remove the ADF unit. (ADF Unit) Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover) Remove the scanner upper cover [A].
  • Page 316 Scanner Move the carriage to the right. To move the carriage, hold the carriage belt and move it carefully. • Never hold the carriage itself. • Remove the brackets [A][B]. Slide the bracket [A] and then detach the carriage belt [B] from the pulley. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-82...

  • Page 317: Reinstalling The Scanner Carriage

    Scanner Disconnect the FFC [B] while lifting up the scanner carriage [A]. ( In the area [C], the FFC is attached with double-sided tape. Do not try to strip the • FFC [B] off by force. • When reassembling, be sure to align the tape position where originally attached. Remove the shaft [B] from the carriage [A].
  • Page 318 Scanner The FFC must not be sagging and must not drag on the bottom of the scanner unit [B]. • The FFC must be hooked at part [A] of the carriage. • D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-84...

  • Page 319: Internal Finisher (Im C400Srf Only)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) 4.8 INTERNAL FINISHER (IM C400SRF ONLY) 4.8.1 REMOVING THE INTERNAL FINISHER Open the front cover. Remove the paper exit front cover [A]. Remove the paper exit tray [A]. 4-85 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 320 Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) Remove the upper left cover [A]. Remove the inner cover [A]. Remove the internal finisher [A] from the main machine. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-86...

  • Page 321: Stapler Unit

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) 4.8.2 STAPLER UNIT Open the front cover. Remove the paper exit front cover [A]. Remove the stapler unit with bracket [A]. Remove the stapler unit [A]. 4-87 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 322: Gathering Roller Motor (M18)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) 4.8.3 GATHERING ROLLER MOTOR (M18) Remove the internal finisher. (Removing the Internal Finisher) Remove the gathering roller motor (M18) [A] ( x 2, x 1). 4.8.4 PAPER EXIT MOTOR (M17) Remove the internal finisher. (Removing the Internal Finisher) Remove the paper exit motor bracket [A] ( x 2,...

  • Page 323: Shift Roller Motor (M19)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) 4.8.5 SHIFT ROLLER MOTOR (M19) Remove the internal finisher. (Removing the Internal Finisher) Remove the paper exit motor. (Paper Exit Motor (M17)) Remove the shift roller motor bracket [A] ( x 2). Remove the shift roller motor (M19) [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1).

  • Page 324: Tray Lift Motor (M22)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) 4.8.7 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (M22) Remove the internal finisher. (Removing the Internal Finisher) Remove the main board cover. Release the tray lift motor bracket [A]. Remove the gear [A] and bushing [B] ( x 1). D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-90...
  • Page 325 Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) Remove the gear [A] and shaft [B] ( x 1). Remove the gear [A] ( x 1). Remove the tray lift motor (M22) [A] ( x 2). 4-91 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 326: Jogger Motor (M20)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) 4.8.8 JOGGER MOTOR (M20) Remove the internal finisher. (Removing the Internal Finisher) Remove the transport motor. (Transport Motor (M16)) Remove the paper exit upper cover [A]. Remove the cover [A] ( x 1). Remove the guide plate [A] ( x 1).
  • Page 327 Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) Remove the jogger fence HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1). Remove the two screws. Remove the jogger motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2). Remove the jogger motor (M20) [A] ( x 2). 4-93 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 328: Exit Guide Plate Motor (M21)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) 4.8.9 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR (M21) Open the front cover. Remove the paper exit front cover [A]. Remove the exit guide plate motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1). Remove the exit guide plate motor (M21) [A] ( x 2).

  • Page 329: Shift Roller Hp Sensor (S37)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) 4.8.10 SHIFT ROLLER HP SENSOR (S37) Remove the internal finisher. (Removing the Internal Finisher) Remove the shift roller HP sensor (S37) [A] ( x 1). 4.8.11 GATHERING ROLLER HP SENSOR (S38) Remove the internal finisher. (Removing the Internal Finisher) Remove the gathering roller motor bracket [A] (...

  • Page 330: Jogger Fence Hp Sensor (S41)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) 4.8.12 JOGGER FENCE HP SENSOR (S41) Remove the internal finisher. (Removing the Internal Finisher) Remove the paper exit upper cover [A]. Remove the cover [A] ( x 1). Remove the guide plate [A] ( x 1). D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-96...

  • Page 331: Entrance Sensor (S45)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) Remove the jogger fence HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1). Remove the jogger fence HP sensor (S41) [A] ( x 1, x 1). 4.8.13 ENTRANCE SENSOR (S45) Remove the internal finisher. (Removing the Internal Finisher) Remove the paper exit upper cover [A].
  • Page 332 Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) Remove the entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1). Remove the entrance sensor (S45) [A] ( x 1, x 1). Remove the anti-static cover from the Entrance Sensor (S45) [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-98...

  • Page 333: Paper Exit Sensor (S43)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) 4.8.14 PAPER EXIT SENSOR (S43) Remove the internal finisher. (Removing the Internal Finisher) Remove the paper exit upper cover [A]. Remove the cover [A] ( x 1). Remove the guide plate [A] ( x 1). 4-99 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 334: Remaining Paper Sensor (S40)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) Remove the paper exit sensor (S43) [A] ( x1). 4.8.15 REMAINING PAPER SENSOR (S40) Remove the internal finisher. (Removing the Internal Finisher) Remove the Remaining Paper Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1). Remove the Remaining Paper Sensor (S40) [A] ( x 1).

  • Page 335: Staple Tray Paper Sensor (S42)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) 4.8.16 STAPLE TRAY PAPER SENSOR (S42) Remove the internal finisher. (Removing the Internal Finisher) Remove the staple tray paper sensor bracket [A] ( x 1). Remove the staple tray paper sensor (S42) [A] ( x 1). 4-101 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 336: Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S39)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) 4.8.17 TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR (S39) Open the front cover. Remove the paper exit front cover [A]. Remove the paper exit tray [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-102...

  • Page 337: Interlock Switch (Sw3)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) Remove the tray lower limit sensor (S39) [A]. 4.8.18 INTERLOCK SWITCH (SW3) Open the front cover. Remove the paper exit front cover [A]. Remove the paper exit tray [A]. 4-103 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 338 Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) Remove the bracket [A]. Remove the interlock switch (SW3) [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-104...

  • Page 339: Stopper Solenoid (Sol3)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) 4.8.19 STOPPER SOLENOID (SOL3) Remove the internal finisher. (Removing the Internal Finisher) Remove the bracket [A]. Remove the stopper solenoid (SOL3) [A]. 4-105 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 340: Main Board (Pcb25)

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) 4.8.20 MAIN BOARD (PCB25) Open the front cover. Remove the paper exit front cover [A]. Remove the paper exit tray [A]. Remove the main board cover. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-106...

  • Page 341: When Reinstalling The Main Board

    Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only) Remove the main board (PCB25). When Reinstalling the Main Board Check the DIP switch [A] on the old main board. If the settings on the new main board differ from the old main board, change the settings on the new main board to match the old main board.

  • Page 342: Laser Optics

    Laser Optics 4.9 LASER OPTICS Turn off the main power switch (SW1) and unplug the machine before beginning any of • the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injuries. 4.9.1 WARNING DECAL LOCATION The warning decal is attached as shown below. 4.9.2 LASER UNITS •...
  • Page 343 Laser Optics Be sure to install the washer under the screw when assembling. • Pull the laser unit [A] out slightly, open the connector cover, and then disconnect the FFC [B]. ( × 1) 4-109 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 344: Adjustment After Laser Unit Replacement

    Adjustment” 4.9.3 LD UNIT COOLING FAN (FAN2) IM C300 series/IM C400F Remove the following parts. • Scanner Unit with the ADF • Operation Panel IM C300 series/IM C400F • • Paper Exit Tray for IM C300 series/IM C400F D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-110...

  • Page 345: Im C300 Series/Im C400F

    • Remove the front right cover [A] and hinge cover [B]. Remove the scanner rear cover[A] ,scanner rear small cover [B] and rear upper cover [C]. Remove the ADF Unit. (IM C300 series/IM C400F) Remove the internal finisher.(Removing the Internal...
  • Page 346 Laser Optics Remove the LD unit cooling fan cover [A]. Remove the LD unit cooling fan (FAN2) [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-112...

  • Page 347: Pcdu, Toner Supply

    4.10 PCDU, TONER SUPPLY 4.10.1 PCDU (PHOTO CONDUCTOR AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT) The PCDU (K) for IM C300 is different from the one for IM C400. Make sure that you • use the correct part number when ordering a PCDU (K).
  • Page 348 PCDU, Toner Supply Remove the PCDU [A]. (The examples [A] in the photo are for yellow) Check that the ITB has no tension before removing the PCDU. Otherwise, the ITB may be damaged. To release the tension of the ITB, turn the ITB contact cam's screw [A] counterclockwise, until the flat part of the half moon on the screw points to the right.

  • Page 349: Toner Bottle Sensor Board (Pcb7)

    PCDU, Toner Supply automatically. • After replacing the PCDU, do the skew adjustment manually. See “Color Skew Adjustment”. 4.10.2 TONER BOTTLE SENSOR BOARD (PCB7) Remove the following parts. Right Rear Cover • • Rear Cover • Upper Left Cover • Left Cover PSU (AC) (PCB17), PSU (DC) (PCB16) •...
  • Page 350 PCDU, Toner Supply Remove the toner supply motor unit [A]. Remove the gear [A]. Remove the shaft [A], bearing [B], and gear [C]. Remove the toner supply motor [A] (M1-M4). D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-116...

  • Page 351: Toner Transport Section

    PCDU, Toner Supply 4.10.4 TONER TRANSPORT SECTION Before replacing the toner transport section (the toner sub-hopper), reset the PM counter and execute the forced toner supply. Turn the power ON. Enter the SP mode. Set the following SPs (Manual New Unit Set) to “1” depending upon the color of the replaced unit to reset the PM counter.
  • Page 352 PCDU, Toner Supply • After removing the toner supply motors (M1-M4), secure four screws [A] on the toner transport section to prevent toner from flying off. Remove the toner bottles (all colors). Remove the PCDU (all colors). (PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)) Remove the toner supply unit [A].
  • Page 353 PCDU, Toner Supply Remove the toner transport section [A]. 4-119 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 354: Waste Toner

    Reset the PM counter. (Refer to Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts) Turn the power OFF. Pull out the paper tray.(This procedure is for IM C300 series/IM C400F) Open the front cover. Pull out the waste toner bottle [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 355: Waste Toner Full Sensor (S36)

    Waste Toner Install the five waste toner bottle caps on the waste toner inlets. The examples [A] in the photo are for black. 4.11.2 WASTE TONER FULL SENSOR (S36) Remove the waste toner bottle. (Waste Toner Bottle) Remove the waste toner full sensor (S36) [A]. 4-121 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 356: Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor (S26)

    Waste Toner 4.11.3 WASTE TONER BOTTLE SET SENSOR (S26) Remove the waste toner bottle. (Waste Toner Bottle) Remove the waste toner bottle set sensor (S26) [A]. • Release the tab with a jeweler’s screwdriver to remove the sensor. Remove the harness from the waste toner bottle set sensor (S26) [A]. ( ×...

  • Page 357: Image/Paper Transfer

    Remove the following parts. • Waste Toner Bottle • PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit) • Fusing Unit Remove the tension spring cover [A]. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF Release the tension spring [A]. IM C300 series/IM C400F 4-123 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 358 Image/Paper Transfer IM C400SRF Release the tension belt [A]. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-124...

  • Page 359: After Replacing The Image Transfer Belt Unit

    Image/Paper Transfer Put a sheet of paper [A] on the duplex unit with the short edge of the paper pointing towards the ITB unit. This is to protect the paper transfer unit from toner when removing the ITB unit. • Remove the ITB unit securing bracket [A].

  • Page 360: Itb Lift Motor (M14)

    Image/Paper Transfer 4.12.2 ITB LIFT MOTOR (M14) Remove the following parts. • Right Rear Cover • Rear Cover Upper Left Cover • • Left Cover • Controller Box PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4) • • PSU (AC) (PCB17), PSU (DC) (PCB16) •...

  • Page 361: Itb Lift Hp Sensor (S33)

    Image/Paper Transfer Remove the cover [A]. ( × 2) Remove the gear [A] and ITB lift motor (M14) [B]. ( × 2) 4.12.3 ITB LIFT HP SENSOR (S33) Remove the following parts. • Right Rear Cover • Rear Cover Upper Left Cover •...
  • Page 362 Image/Paper Transfer • Fusing Motor (M13) • Paper Transport Motor (M12) • Drive Unit Remove the ITB lift unit [A]. Remove the ITB lift HP sensor (S33) with the bracket [A]. Remove the ITB lift HP sensor (S33) [A]. (Hook × 2) D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-128...

  • Page 363: Id Sensor (M27-M29)

    Image/Paper Transfer 4.12.4 ID SENSOR (M27-M29) Remove the ITB unit. (ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Unit) Remove the guide plate [A]. Remove the ID sensor [A] with the bracket. Remove the cover [A]. Remove the ID sensors (M27-M29) [A]. 4-129 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 364: Before Installing A New Id Sensor Board

    Image/Paper Transfer • ID sensor(front) (S27) ID sensor(center) (S28) • ID sensor(rear) (S29) • When cleaning the ID sensor, wipe the parts [A] with a damp cloth. • Do not wipe it with a dry cloth, or the ID sensor may attract dirt because of static •...

  • Page 365: Id Sensor Shutter Solenoid (Sol2)

    Image/Paper Transfer Enter correction coefficients on barcode sheet for value 1 and 2. For example, enter “1.02” with value 2. • Exit the SP mode. 4.12.5 ID SENSOR SHUTTER SOLENOID (SOL2) Remove the following parts. • Waste Toner Bottle • PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit) Fusing Unit •...

  • Page 366: Paper Transfer Roller Unit

    Image/Paper Transfer 4.12.6 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT Before replacing the paper transfer roller unit, reset the PM counter. Turn the power ON. Reset the PM counter. (Refer to Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts) Turn the power OFF. Open the right door. If you find paper dust on the registration section when you open the duplex unit, •...

  • Page 367: Drive

    Drive 4.13 DRIVE 4.13.1 OVERVIEW Description Description Development motor (CMY) (M9) Registration clutch (CL8) Drum motor (CMY) (M10) Duplex clutch (CL6) Drum motor (M11) Bypass feed clutch (CL7) Development clutch (K) (CL5) Paper feed clutch (CL9) Tray lift motor (M15) Bypass tray lift clutch (CL1) Fusing motor(M13) Reverse clutch (CL2)
  • Page 368 Drive Description Description Development motor (CMY) (M9) Duplex clutch (CL6) Drum motor (CMY) (M10) Bypass feed clutch (CL7) Drum motor (M11) Paper feed clutch (CL9) Development clutch (K) (CL5) Bypass tray lift clutch (CL1) Tray lift motor (M15) Reverse clutch (CL2) Fusing motor(M13) Paper exit clutch (CL3) Paper transport motor (M12)
  • Page 369 Drive Description Description Development motor (CMY) (M9) Duplex clutch (CL6) Drum motor (CMY) (M10) Bypass feed clutch (CL7) Drum motor (M11) Paper feed clutch (CL9) Development clutch (K) (CL5) Bypass tray lift clutch (CL1) Tray lift motor (M15) Reverse clutch (CL2) Fusing motor(M13) Paper exit clutch (CL3) Paper transport motor (M12)

  • Page 370: Development Motor (Cmy) (M9)

    High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer) (PCB23) Remove the development motor (CMY) (M9) [A]. ( × 4, × 1) The motor with the white label is for the IM C300 series. The motor with the green label is for the IM C400 series. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-136...

  • Page 371: Drum Motor (Cmy) (M10)

    High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer) (PCB23) Remove the drum motor (CMY) (M10) [A]. ( × 4, × 1) The motor with the white label is for the IM C300 series. The motor with the green label is for the IM C400 series. 4-137 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 372: Drum Motor (M11)

    High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer) (PCB23) Remove the drum motor (M11) [A]. ( × 4, × 1) The motor with the white label is for the IM C300 series. The motor with the green label is for the IM C400 series. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-138...

  • Page 373: Development Clutch (K) (Cl5)

    High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) (PCB22) • • High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer) (PCB23) • Drum Motor (M11) Remove the development clutch cover [A] by rotating it counterclockwise. Remove the bearing [A]. Remove the development clutch (K) (CL5) [B]. IM C300 series 4-139 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 374: Drive Unit

    Drive IM C400 series 4.13.6 DRIVE UNIT Remove the following parts. • Right Rear Cover • Rear Cover Upper Left Cover • • Left Cover • Controller Box • PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4) • PSU (AC) (PCB17), PSU (DC) (PCB16) •...
  • Page 375 Drive IM C300 series IM C400 series Remove the drive unit [A]. ( × 6) IM C300 series 4-141 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 376: Tray Lift Motor (M15)

    Drive IM C400 series 4.13.7 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (M15) Remove the following parts. • Right Rear Cover • Rear Cover Upper Left Cover • • Left Cover • Controller Box • PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4) • PSU (AC) (PCB17), PSU (DC) (PCB16) •...
  • Page 377 Drive Remove the tray lift motor unit [A]. Remove the motor cover [A]. ( × 2) Remove the tray lift motor (M15) [A]. ( × 2) Remove the following parts. Right Rear Cover • • Rear Cover • Rear Bottom Cover Tray Set Sensor (S34) •...

  • Page 378: Fusing Motor (M13)

    Right Rear Cover Rear Cover • • Upper Left Cover • Left Cover • Controller Box • PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4) • PSU (AC) (PCB17), PSU (DC) (PCB16) Remove the cover [A]. ( × 2, × 1) IM C300 series D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-144...

  • Page 379: Paper Transport Motor (M12)

    Drive IM C400 series Remove the high-voltage power supply (Development). (High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) (PCB22)) Release the harness and remove the harness guide [A]. ( × 4, × 1) Remove the fusing motor (M13) [A]. ( × 4) 4.13.9 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR (M12) Remove the following parts.
  • Page 380 High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) (PCB22) • Fusing Motor (M13) Remove the fusing motor bracket [A]. Remove the harness guide [A]. ( × 3, × 14) There are connectors behind the harness guide. Remove the guide carefully. • IM C300 series D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-146...
  • Page 381 Drive IM C400 series Remove the paper transport motor (M12) [A]. The motor with the white label is for the IM C300 series. The motor with the green label is for the IM C400 series. IM C300 series 4-147 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 382: Duplex Clutch (Cl6), Bypass Feed Clutch (Cl7), Registration

    Drive IM C400 series 4.13.10 DUPLEX CLUTCH (CL6), BYPASS FEED CLUTCH (CL7), REGISTRATION CLUTCH (CL8), PAPER FEED CLUTCH (CL9), VERTICAL TRANSPORT CLUTCH (CL10) Remove the following parts. • Right Rear Cover • Rear Cover • Upper Left Cover • Left Cover •...
  • Page 383 Drive Remove the paper transport unit [D]. ( × 3) Remove the paper transport unit cover [A]. ( × 4) Remove each clutch. ( × 1 each) [A]: Duplex clutch (CL6) [B]: Bypass feed clutch (CL7) [C]: Paper feed clutch (CL9) [D]: Registration clutch (CL8) 4-149 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 384: Remove The Following Parts

    Drive Remove the following parts. • Right Rear Cover • Rear Cover Upper Left Cover • • Left Cover • Controller Box PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4) • • PSU (AC) (PCB17), PSU (DC) (PCB16) • High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) (PCB22) •...
  • Page 385 Drive Remove the four speed nuts [A]. Remove each clutch. [A]: Duplex clutch (CL6) [B]: Bypass feed clutch (CL7) [C]: Vertical transport clutch (CL10) [D]: Paper feed clutch (CL9) [E]: Registration clutch (CL8) 4-151 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 386: Fusing

    Fusing 4.14 FUSING 4.14.1 FUSING UNIT • Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of the procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause serious burns. • Do not touch the surface of the sleeve belt, when replacing the fusing unit. •...

  • Page 387: Fusing Upper Cover

    Fusing 4.14.2 FUSING UPPER COVER Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit) Remove the fusing upper cover [A]. ( × 4) 4.14.3 FUSING LOWER COVER Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit) Remove the fusing lower cover [A]. ( × 4) 4.14.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE Remove the fusing unit.

  • Page 388: Fusing Thermostat (Th6)

    Fusing • There are two screw holes for each screw on the entrance guide plate. Use the outer holes when tightening the entrance guide plate. Different types of screws are used for [A] and [B]: • [A]: Shoulder screw [B]: Double sems screw (a screw with a washer) 4.14.5 FUSING THERMOSTAT (TH6) Remove the fusing upper cover.

  • Page 389: Pressure Roller Thermistors (Th2-Th4)

    Fusing Push the hooks and remove the fusing thermistor (non-contact sensor) (S10) [A]. ( × 4.14.7 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTORS (TH2-TH4) Remove the fusing upper cover (Fusing Upper Cover) Raise the fusing lever. Remove the bracket [A]. ( × 4) 4-155 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 390 Fusing • Lift the fusing lever [A] while removing the upper screws. Remove the pressure roller thermistors [A], [B] or [C]. A: Pressure roller thermistor(edge: front) (TH2) B: Pressure roller thermistor(edge: center) (TH4) C: Pressure roller thermistor(edge: rear) (TH3) D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-156...

  • Page 391: Pressure Roller

    Fusing 4.14.8 PRESSURE ROLLER Before replacing the pressure roller, reset the PM counter. Turn the power ON. Reset the PM counter. (Refer to Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts) Turn the power OFF. Remove the fusing sleeve belt assembly. ( Fusing Sleeve Belt Assembly Remove the pressure roller [A].
  • Page 392 Fusing Place a cloth or sheet of paper under the fusing unit when removing the fusing lower cover. Otherwise, the screw(s) and gear(s) exposed after removing the cover will scratch or transfer grease to the work surface. Remove the springs [B], which are on both ends of the separation plate [A], from the holes in the frame.
  • Page 393 Fusing Rotate the separation plate [A], and remove it from the frame. Do not apply excess force to the separation plate when removing it, to prevent the separation plate from deforming. When reattaching the separation plate, make sure that the plate is firmly attached to the frame hole.
  • Page 394 Fusing Remove the screws of the frame [A] at the right. Remove the screws of the frame [A] at the left. ( × 2) Pull out the rear frame [A], and take out the fusing sleeve belt assembly [B]. Do not touch the surface of the fusing sleeve belt assembly. When reattaching the rear frame, do not let the fusing sleeve belt hit the projection of the thermostat and the frame.
  • Page 395 Fusing When reattaching the fusing sleeve belt assembly, do not let the fusing sleeve belt assembly hit the projection of the sensor or the screws on the stay. Make sure that both side plates fit right into the positioning bumps on the frame before securing the screws.

  • Page 396: Fusing Entrance Sensor (S3)

    If you find paper dust in the registration section when you open the right door, • remove the dust. Otherwise, the dust can cause lines on the image. Remove the fusing entrance sensor (S3) [A]. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-162...

  • Page 397: Fusing Exit Sensor (S8)

    Fusing 4.14.11 FUSING EXIT SENSOR (S8) Remove the following parts. • Fusing Unit • Scanner Unit with the ADF • Operation Panel Scanner Inner Cover • • Paper Exit Tray • Paper Exit Unit Remove the fusing unit and paper exit unit for IM C400SRF Remove the fusing exit sensor (S8) [A].

  • Page 398: Fusing Thermopile (Th1)

    Fusing 4.14.12 FUSING THERMOPILE (TH1) Remove the following parts. • Fusing Unit • Scanner Unit with the ADF • Operation Panel • Scanner Inner Cover Paper Exit Tray • • Paper Exit Unit Remove just the fusing unit and paper exit unit for IM C400SRF Remove the fusing thermopile (TH1) with the bracket [A].

  • Page 399: New Fusing Unit Detection Fuse (S9)

    Fusing 4.14.13 NEW FUSING UNIT DETECTION FUSE (S9) Remove the fusing unit.(Fusing Unit) Remove the fusing upper cover. (Fusing Upper Cover) Remove the new fusing unit detection fuse (S9) [A] if the old blown fuse is attached. ( Connect the fuse connector, and insert the fuse into place from the upper side. Refer to the flow chart below when SC544-00 or SC554-00 occurs.
  • Page 400 Fusing *1:Make sure to keep the door closed when executing SP5-810-002 (Fusing SC Reset Hard High Temp Detection). If executed with the door open, the SC will not be cleared. If the SC reset procedure is executed when the door is open, "SC reset failed" will be shown without blowing the fuse for new fusing unit detection.

  • Page 401: Paper Feed

    Paper Feed 4.15 PAPER FEED 4.15.1 IM C300 SERIES Paper Feed Roller, Friction Pad Before replacing the paper feed roller and friction pad, reset the PM counter. Turn the power ON. Reset the PM counter. (Refer to Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts) Turn the power OFF.

  • Page 402: Registration Sensor (S32), Paper Feed Sensor (S31)

    Paper Feed Remove the paper feed roller [A]. (Hook × 1) Remove the friction pad [A]. (Hooks × 2) Registration Sensor (S32), Paper Feed Sensor (S31) Open the right door. If you find paper dust in the registration section when you open the duplex unit, •...
  • Page 403 Paper Feed Remove the sensor cover [B]. Remove the sensor bracket [A]. Remove the registration sensor (S32) [A]. (Hook × 4) Remove the paper feed sensor (S31) [B]. (Hook × 4) 4-169 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 404: Tray Paper End Sensor (Main Unit) (S30)

    Paper Feed Tray Paper End Sensor (main unit) (S30) Remove the waste toner bottle. (Waste Toner Bottle) Remove the tray paper end sensor (main unit) (S30) [A]. (hook × 2) When reattaching the tray paper end sensor (main unit) (S30), make sure that the shaft of the feeler is hooked onto the bracket [A].

  • Page 405: Draw-In Unit

    Paper Feed Draw-in Unit Remove the following parts. Rear Cover • • Upper Left Cover • Left Cover • PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4) Remove the screw. Remove the draw-in unit [A] with bracket. Remove the bracket [B] and grounding plate [C] from the draw-in unit [A]. 4-171 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 406: Im C400 Series

    Paper Feed • When installing the draw-in unit, fit the bracket’s holes onto the bosses on the mainframe. ( × 4) 4.15.2 IM C400 SERIES Pick-up roller/Paper feed roller/Friction roller Before replacing the Pick-up roller,Paper feed roller and Friction roller, reset the PM counter.

  • Page 407: Paper Feed Unit

    Paper Feed Remove the Pick-up roller [A],Paper feed roller [B] and Friction roller [C]. Paper Feed Unit Remove the following parts. • Rear Cover Front Cover • • Right Rear Cover • Right Bottom Cover • Duplex Unit Bypass Feed Unit •...

  • Page 408: Paper Feed Sensor (S31)

    Paper Feed Remove the guide [A]. Remove the paper feed unit [A]. Paper Feed Sensor (S31) Remove the paper feed unit.(Paper Feed Unit) Remove the paper feed sensor bracket [A]. Remove the paper feed sensor (S31) [A].(Hook x 4) D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-174...

  • Page 409: Tray Paper End Sensor (Main Unit) (S30)

    Paper Feed Tray Paper End Sensor (main unit) (S30) Remove the paper feed unit.(Paper Feed Unit) Remove the tray paper end sensor (main unit) (S30) [A].(Hook x 4) Tray Lift Sensor (S35) Remove the paper feed unit.(Paper Feed Unit) Remove the tray lift sensor (S35) [A].(Hook x 4) 4-175 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 410: Registration Sensor (S32)

    Paper Feed Registration Sensor (S32) Open the right door. If you find paper dust in the registration section when you open the duplex unit, • remove the dust. Otherwise, the dust can cause lines on the image. Remove the sensor cover [A]. Remove the sensor bracket [A].

  • Page 411: Tray Set Sensor (S34)

    Paper Feed Tray Set Sensor (S34) Remove the rear cover.(Rear Cover) Remove the rear bottom cover.(Rear Bottom Cover) Remove the stay [A]. Remove the sensor bracket [B]. Remove the tray set sensor (S34) [A]. 4-177 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 412: Draw-In Unit

    Paper Feed Draw-in Unit Remove the rear cover.(Rear Cover) Remove the rear bottom cover.(Rear Bottom Cover) Remove the stay [A]. Remove the draw-in unit [B]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-178...

  • Page 413: Bypass

    Bypass 4.16 BYPASS 4.16.1 BYPASS TRAY Open the bypass tray [A]. Remove the E-rings [A], and stopper. (Stopper x 1) Close the bypass tray [A] slightly and pull it out upwards. Since the bearing on the left side of the main machine is C-cut, align the shaft in the direction of the cut and pull it out.

  • Page 414: Bypass Feed Unit

    Bypass 4.16.2 BYPASS FEED UNIT The bypass feed roller is attached to the bypass feed unit.Therefore, when replacing the bypass feed unit, it is necessary to reset the PM counter. Refer to "Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts". Remove the duplex unit. (Duplex Unit) Disconnect the connector.

  • Page 415: Paper End Sensor (Bypass) (S6)

    Bypass Remove the bypass feed unit [A]. Lift up the left side of the unit and remove it while pulling it out forward. • 4.16.3 PAPER END SENSOR (BYPASS) (S6) Remove the duplex unit.(Duplex Unit) Remove the bypass feed unit. (Bypass Feed Unit) Remove the bracket [A].

  • Page 416: Bypass Paper Width Sensor (S5)

    Bypass Remove the paper end sensor (bypass) (S6) [A]. (Hooks × 4) 4.16.4 BYPASS PAPER WIDTH SENSOR (S5) Remove the duplex unit.(Duplex Unit) Remove the bypass feed unit. (Bypass Feed Unit) Remove the bracket [A]. Remove the bypass paper width sensor (S5) with the holder [A]. Remove the bypass paper width sensor (S5) [A].

  • Page 417: Bypass Feed Roller

    Bypass 4.16.5 BYPASS FEED ROLLER Before replacing the bypass feed roller, reset the PM counter. Turn the power ON. Reset the PM counter. (Refer to Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts) Turn the power OFF. Remove the duplex unit.( Duplex Unit Remove the bypass feed unit.
  • Page 418 Bypass Remove the bearing (bearing × 1) Remove the E-ring at the front of the bypass feed unit ( × 1) Remove the E-ring at the rear of the bypass feed unit ( × 1) Move the front cam and rear cam [B] inward while pushing down the bottom plate [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-184...
  • Page 419 Bypass Remove the bypass feed roller with the shaft from the front side. 10. Remove the bypass feed roller [A] (Hook × 1) 4-185 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 420: Bypass Tray Lift Sensor (S4)

    Bypass 4.16.6 BYPASS TRAY LIFT SENSOR (S4) Remove the duplex unit.(Duplex Unit) Remove the bypass feed unit. (Bypass Feed Unit) Remove the sensor holder [A]. ( × 2, × 1) Remove the gear [A]. Remove the bypass tray lift sensor (S4) [B]. (Hooks × 4) D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-186...

  • Page 421: Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (Cl1)

    Bypass 4.16.7 BYPASS TRAY LIFT CLUTCH (CL1) Remove the duplex unit.(Duplex Unit) Remove the bypass feed unit. (Bypass Feed Unit) Remove the bracket [A]. Disconnect the connector of the clutch. ( × 1) Remove the bypass tray lift clutch (CL1) [A]. ( ×...

  • Page 422: Paper Exit

    Paper Exit 4.17 PAPER EXIT 4.17.1 IM C300 SERIES/IM C400F Paper Exit Unit Remove the following parts. • Scanner Unit with the ADF • Operation Panel Scanner Inner Cover • • Paper Exit Tray Remove the paper exit unit [A].

  • Page 423: Paper Exit Sensor (S7)

    Paper Exit Paper Exit Sensor (S7) Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit) Remove the sensor holder [A]. Remove the paper exit sensor (S7) [A]. ( × 1) 4-189 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 424: Junction Gate Solenoid (Sol1)

    Paper Exit Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1) Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit) Remove the junction gate solenoid (SOL1) [A] with the bracket. Remove the bracket from the junction gate solenoid (SOL1) [A]. When reattaching the junction gate solenoid (SOL1), make sure that the solenoid works in conjunction with the exit junction gate.

  • Page 425: Paper Exit Clutch (Cl3), Reverse Clutch (Cl2)

    Paper Exit Paper Exit Clutch (CL3), Reverse Clutch (CL2) Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit) Remove the cover [A]. Pull out the bushing [A]. 4-191 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 426 Paper Exit Remove the paper exit clutch (CL3) and reverse clutch (CL2) with the bracket [A]. Remove the paper exit clutch (CL3) [A] and reverse clutch (CL2) [B]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-192...

  • Page 427: Im C400Srf

    Paper Exit 4.17.2 IM C400SRF Paper Exit Unit Open the right cover. Remove the scanner rear cover [A],scanner rear small cover [B] and the rear upper cover [C]. Remove the connector [A] Remove the fusing unit.(Fusing Unit) Remove the cover [A]. Remove the paper exit unit [B].

  • Page 428: Paper Exit Sensor (S7)

    Paper Exit Paper Exit Sensor (S7) Remove the cover [A] from the paper exit unit. Remove the paper exit sensor (S7) [A] with the bracket. Remove the paper exit sensor (S7) [A] from the bracket. (Hooks × 1) D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-194...

  • Page 429: Junction Gate Solenoid (Sol1)

    Paper Exit Remove the anti-static cover [A] from the paper exit sensor (S7). Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1) Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit) Remove the junction gate solenoid (SOL1) [A] with the bracket. Remove the bracket from the junction gate solenoid (SOL1) [A]. 4-195 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 430: Paper Exit Clutch (Cl3), Reverse Clutch (Cl2)

    Paper Exit When reattaching the junction gate solenoid (SOL1), make sure that the solenoid works in conjunction with the exit junction gate. Paper Exit Clutch (CL3), Reverse Clutch (CL2) Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit) Remove the gear [A]. Remove the bracket [A] with the paper exit clutch (CL3) and reverse clutch (CL2).
  • Page 431 Paper Exit Remove the paper exit clutch (CL3) [A] and reverse clutch (CL2) [B]. 4-197 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 432: Duplex

    4.18 DUPLEX 4.18.1 DUPLEX UNIT Open the right door. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF Push the lever and reduce the tension of the belt [A], then remove the belt. When reattaching the duplex unit, make sure that the belt [A] is attached firmly. If the belt is not attached, the right door will not be opened even if the opening/closing lever is operated.
  • Page 433 Duplex IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF Lift the paper transport unit [A]. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF Remove the tension spring cover [A]. 4-199 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 434 Duplex IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF Lift the duplex unit, then remove the tension spring [A]. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF Release the tension wire [A] from the roller [B]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-200...
  • Page 435 Duplex IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF Restore the paper transport unit [A]. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF Remove the connector cover [A]. 4-201 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 436 Duplex IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF 10. Disconnect the connectors. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF 11. Release the belt [A]. 12. Remove the duplex unit [B]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-202...

  • Page 437: Duplex Entrance Sensor (S1)

    Duplex IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF 4.18.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR (S1) Open the right door. Remove the sensor cover [A]. 4-203 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 438 Duplex IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF Remove the duplex entrance sensor (S1) [A]. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-204...

  • Page 439: Duplex Exit Sensor (S2)

    Duplex 4.18.3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR (S2) Remove the paper transfer roller unit. (Paper Transfer Roller Unit) Remove the cover [A]. (Hook × 1) Remove the roller unit [A].(This procedure is for IM C400 series) 4-205 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 440 Duplex Remove the bracket [A]. Remove the registration roller unit [A]. Remove the sensor bracket [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-206...

  • Page 441: Right Cover Sensor (Sw2)

    Duplex Remove the duplex exit sensor (S2) [A]. 4.18.4 RIGHT COVER SENSOR (SW2) Open the right door. Release the tab of the right cover sensor (SW2) [A] with a jeweler’s screwdriver. IM C300 series/IM C400F IM C400SRF 4-207 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 442 Duplex Remove the right cover sensor (SW2) [A]. ( × 1) D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-208...

  • Page 443: Electrical Components

    Electrical Components 4.19 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 4.19.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS OVERVIEW Description Description BiCU (PCB1) FCU (PCB2) (if the machine has the fax unit) Controller Board (PCB24) PSU (AC) (PCB17) PSU (DC) (PCB16) Description Description High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) AC Detection Board (PCB18) (PCB22) Toner Bottle Sensor Board (PCB7) High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer)

  • Page 444: Hdd

    Electrical Components 4.19.2 HDD Before replacing the HDD, copy the address book data to an SD card with • SP5-846-051 if there is no problem. • If the customer uses the Data Overwrite Security, IC card reader, or OCR unit, these applications must be installed again after replacing the HDD.

  • Page 445: Adjustment After Replacement

    Electrical Components Adjustment after Replacement Do SP5-832-001 to initialize the HDD. Initialization should be performed for the HDD which was already formatted before. Do SP5-853-001 to download stamp data. If applicable, do SP5-846-052 to restore the address data from SD card to the HDD. Cycle the power OFF/ON.
  • Page 446 Electrical Components Pull out the controller board (PCB24) [A]. Remove the guide rails [A] from the old controller board, and install them on the new controller board. Remove the used NVRAM from the old controller board, and install it on the new controller board.

  • Page 447: Nvram On The Controller Board

    Electrical Components NVRAM on the controller board SC195 (Machine serial number error) will be displayed if you forget to attach the • NVRAM. • Passwords for the Supervisor and Administrator 1 will be discarded later in this procedure. If you mounted the NVRAM in the wrong direction, each component needs to be •...
  • Page 448 Electrical Components Note that the counters for the user will be reset when doing the backup/restore of • the address book data. If they have a backup of the address book data, use their own backup data for • restoring. This is because there is a risk that the data cannot be backed up properly depending on the NVRAM condition.
  • Page 449 Electrical Components 12. Turn the power ON. After turning ON the main power, SC870 will occur and the address book data will • be cleared. • SC673 appears at start-up, but this is normal behavior. This is because the controller and the smart operation panel cannot communicate with each other due to changing the SP settings for the operation panel.
  • Page 450 Electrical Components 23. Execute SP5-755-002 (Hide Administrator Password Change Scrn). After you execute this SP and exit SP mode, the Home screen is displayed and user functions can be used. 24. Make sure that icons for scanner and fax are displayed and enter the values that you note in Step 5.

  • Page 451: Bicu (Pcb1)

    Electrical Components setting before the replacement. - a. SP5-045-001 (Accounting counter: Counter Method) - b. SP5-302-002 (Set Time: Time Difference) Because the PM counters have been reset during NV-RAM replacement, it is • necessary to replace all the PM parts for proper PM management. If a message tells you need an SD card to restore displays after the NVRAM •...
  • Page 452 Electrical Components IM C300 series/IM C400F D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-218...
  • Page 453 Electrical Components IM C400SRF There are three kinds of FFC connectors. A: Disconnect the FFC while pushing the lock lever. B: Disconnect the FFC while lifting up the lock lever. C: Disconnect the FFC while pulling it out straight. It does not have a lock mechanism. 4-219 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 454: Replacing The Smb On The Bicu

    Electrical Components Remove the SMB [A] from the old BiCU and attach it to the new BiCU. Attaching the used SMB to the new BiCU allows users to use old data such as SP • settings. Replacing the SMB on the BiCU •...
  • Page 455 Electrical Components Replace the SMB on the BCU with a new one. Install a new SMB [A] on the BiCU (PCB1) in the right direction. Incorrect • installation of the SMB will damage both the BiCU (PCB1) and SMB. Plug in, and then turn ON the main power switch (SW1). When the power is turned ON, SC195-00 appears.

  • Page 456: Controller Box

    Right Rear Cover Remove the scanner rear cover [A] and scanner rear small cover [B].(This procedure is for IM C300 series/IM C400F) Remove the scanner rear cover [A],scanner rear small cover [B] and rear upper cover [C].(This procedure is for IM C400SRF)
  • Page 457 Electrical Components Release two screws and three tabs for attaching the relay board (PCB12) [A] and FFC, to release the FFC. Remove the FFC fixing bracket [A] on the back side of the FFC. Remove the FFC fixing bracket while turning it counterclockwise and releasing the tab. 4-223 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 458 Electrical Components Release the clamp of the harness to the ADF [A]. Remove the grounding plate [A].(This procedure is for IM C300 series/IM C400F) Remove the controller box cover [A] with the HDD [B]. Disconnect all the connectors on the BiCU (PCB1) [A].
  • Page 459 Electrical Components IM C300 series/IM C400F 4-225 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 460 Electrical Components IM C400SRF 10. Remove the grounding wire [A] and connector [B] from the left side of the controller box. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-226...
  • Page 461 11. Remove the harness guide [C] while releasing the harnesses on it. 12. Remove the brackets ([A] and [B]), and two screws from the right side of the controller box. 13. Remove the controller box [A]. IM C300 series/IM C400F 4-227 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 462: Psu (Ac) (Pcb17), Psu (Dc) (Pcb16)

    Electrical Components IM C400SRF 4.19.6 PSU (AC) (PCB17), PSU (DC) (PCB16) • Do not touch the areas outlined in red in the following diagrams when replacing the PSU. Residual charge on the board may cause electric shock. • When replacing the PSU, please DO NOT put too much pressure on electrical components on the PSU, such as the coil.

  • Page 463: Remove The Following Parts

    Electrical Components • For 200V: Common Procedures Remove the following parts. • Rear Cover • Upper Left Cover • Left Cover • Right Rear Cover • Controller Box • PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4) Disconnect the harness and remove the harness guide [A]. There is a hook in the red dotted area in the photo.

  • Page 464: Follow Common Procedures Above

    Electrical Components For removing the PSUs (PCB16)(PCB17) with the bracket. Follow common procedures above. Disconnect the connectors on the PSU (AC) (PCB17) [A] and PSU (DC) (PCB16) [B]. Note: Please avoid putting too much pressure on the PSU, as it might trigger a short circuit. For removing the PSU (DC) (PCB16) with the bracket.
  • Page 465 Electrical Components The locking wire saddle is released from the notch above the cooling plate. For removing the PSU (AC) (PCB17) with the bracket. Follow common procedures above. Remove the PSU (AC) (PCB17) [A]. Note: Please avoid putting too much pressure on the PSU, as it might trigger a short circuit. Reference Detached Properly Soldered...

  • Page 466: Ac Detection Board (Pcb18)

    • PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4) • PSU (AC) (PCB17), PSU (DC) (PCB16) Remove the AC detection board (PCB18) with the cover [A]. IM C300 series IM C400 series Remove the AC detection board (PCB18) [A]. ( × 2, × 1)

  • Page 467: High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) (Pcb22)

    Electrical Components 4.19.8 HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (DEVELOPMENT) (PCB22) Remove the following parts. • Rear Cover • Upper Left Cover Left Cover • • Right Rear Cover • Controller Box PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4) • • PSU (AC) (PCB17), PSU (DC) (PCB16) Disconnect the harness and remove the harness guide [A].
  • Page 468 Electrical Components Remove the high-voltage power supply (Development) (PCB22) [A] with the bracket. ( × 5, hook × 1) Remove the high-voltage power supply (Development) (PCB22) [A]. ( × 5, × 1) D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-234...

  • Page 469: High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer) (Pcb23)

    Electrical Components 4.19.9 HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (TRANSFER) (PCB23) Remove the following parts. • Rear Cover • Upper Left Cover • Left Cover Right Rear Cover • • Controller Box • PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4) • PSU (AC) (PCB17), PSU (DC) (PCB16) Disconnect the harness attached to the high-voltage power supply’s bracket, and then remove the high-voltage power supply (Transfer) (PCB23) [A] with the bracket.

  • Page 470: Psu Exhaust Fan (Fan4)

    Remove the bracket [A]. ( × 2) Remove the screws of the fan cover [B]. ( × 4) IM C300 series IM C400 series Disconnect the connectors and pull out the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4) [A] with the cover. IM C300 series...
  • Page 471 Electrical Components IM C400 series Remove the cover from the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4) [A]. ( × 2) IM C300 series IM C400 series 4-237 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 472: Pcdu Cooling Fan (Fan3)

    Electrical Components • Install the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4) with its label facing the inside of the machine. 4.19.11 PCDU COOLING FAN (FAN3) Remove the upper left cover. (Upper Left Cover) Remove the left cover. (Left Cover) Remove the PCDU cooling fan (FAN3) [A] with the duct. ( ×...

  • Page 473: Fusing Unit Cooling Fan (Fan1)

    Install the fusing unit cooling fan (FAN1) with its label facing the outside of the machine. 4.19.13 TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR (S18)/MAIN POWER SWITCH (SW1) Pull out the paper tray. Remove the front lower cover [A]. IM C300 series/IM C400F 4-239 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 474: Imaging Temperature Sensor (Th5)

    Electrical Components IM C400SRF Remove the temperature/humidity sensor (S18) [A] and the main power switch (SW1) [B]. 4.19.14 IMAGING TEMPERATURE SENSOR (TH5) Remove the following parts. Right Rear Cover • • Rear Cover • Upper Left Cover Left Cover • •...

  • Page 475: Interlock Switches

    Remove the imaging temperature sensor (TH5) [A] while releasing the harness of the imaging temperature sensor (TH5) from the harness guide [B]. ( × 1, × 1) 4.19.15 INTERLOCK SWITCHES Pull out the paper tray. Remove the front lower cover [A]. IM C300 series IM C400 series 4-241 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 476 Electrical Components Remove the cover [A]. Remove the interlock switch cover [A]. IM C300 series IM C400 series Remove the Interlock switches [A]. ( × each 2) D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-242...

  • Page 477: Paper Exit Exhaust Fan (Fan5)

    Electrical Components 4.19.16 PAPER EXIT EXHAUST FAN (FAN5) This procedure is for the Finisher Model. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover) Remove the right rear cover. (Right Rear Cover) Open the right cover. Remove the scanner rear cover [A],scanner rear small cover [B] and rear upper cover [C]. Remove the scanner unit.(Scanner Unit with the ADF)
  • Page 478 Electrical Components Remove the grounding plate [B]. Remove the paper exit exhaust fan (FAN5) with the bracket [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 4-244...
  • Page 479 Electrical Components 10. Remove the bracket [A]. 11. Remove the paper exit exhaust fan (FAN5) [A] (Hook×3). 4-245 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 480: Image Adjustment

    Image Adjustment 4.20 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT 4.20.1 HOW TO USE THE COLOR CHARTS Here is an introduction of how to check the image quality using the color charts. Check Check Item Description Area Frame line Registration Check the registration amount of the leading edge and amount trailing edge (sub scan direction).
  • Page 481 Image Adjustment Check Check Item Description Area superimposed frame lines. If deviations in the main scan direction and sub scan direction are the same, it is a right angle. 1. Check the lengths between the leading edge and front end frame line at measuring positions [A] and [B]. 2.
  • Page 482 Image Adjustment Check Check Item Description Area scan direction and sub scan direction. Overlay the scale on any frame line, adjust to a position where the frame line is not hidden, and measure the most distant position. If difficult to check, draw an auxiliary baseline in position with no distortion to the frame line, and measure the deviation length from the baseline with the scale.
  • Page 483 Image Adjustment Check Check Item Description Area Colored Color Check the distances [A] between the colors making up the L-shaped registration RGB lines (Y+M/ Y+C/ C+M), using a loupe. lines errors Solid color Solid density Check the density of each color patch between the chart patches and the copy .
  • Page 484 Image Adjustment Check Check Item Description Area characters reproducibility and that have no broken lines or blurred characters. (no broken lines or blurred characters) Gray Gray color Check that the color and density of the 3rd row in the chart patches difference and and the copy are the same.

  • Page 485: Scanning

    Image Adjustment Check Check Item Description Area A: Center line, B: Fold line, C: Distance between the center line and the fold line Vertical Equal Check the magnification error in the sub scan direction scale magnification using the crossed lines 100mm away from the leading and (Sub scan trailing edges of the paper direction)

  • Page 486: Scanner Sub-Scan Magnification

    Image Adjustment • Use C-5Y color chart to do the following adjustments. Scanner Sub-Scan Magnification A: Sub-scan magnification Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP4-008-001(Sub Scan Magnification Adj.) if necessary.

  • Page 487: Adf Adjustment

    Image Adjustment 4.20.3 ADF ADJUSTMENT ADF Side-to-Side and Leading Edge Registration Use A4/LT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown below. Put the temporary test chart on the ADF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration.

  • Page 488: Adf Sub-Scan Magnification

    Image Adjustment 1: Feed direction SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range SP6-006-014 Trailing Edge Erase Width (1-Pass):Face ± 5.0 mm SP6-006-015 Trailing Edge Erase Width (1-Pass):Back ± 5.0 mm ADF Sub-scan Magnification Put the temporary test chart on the ADF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the magnification ratio.

  • Page 489: Registration Standard

    Image Adjustment Trailing edge (sub-scan direction): • D = 3.25 ± 2.75 mm Side to side (main-scan direction): • A = C = 2.25 ± 1.75 mm Registration Standard Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP mode (SP1-002) to adjust the side-to-side registration for the optional paper feed unit and duplex unit.

  • Page 490: Adjustment Procedure

    Image Adjustment SP No. SP Name Range SP1-001-021 Leading Edge Registration: Duplex: Special 1 ± 9.0 mm SP1-001-022 Leading Edge Registration: Tray: Special 1: 1200 ± 9.0 mm SP1-001-023 Leading Edge Registration: By-pass: Special 1: 1200 ± 9.0 mm SP1-001-024 Leading Edge Registration: Duplex: Special 1: 1200 ±...

  • Page 491: Color Registration

    Image Adjustment [1]: Feed direction, [2]: Image area Enter the SP mode. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003. Check the erase margin A and B. Adjust them with SP2-103-001 to -004 if necessary. Leading edge: 0.0 to 9.9 mm (default: 4.2 mm) •...

  • Page 492: Printer Gamma Correction

    Image Adjustment 4.20.7 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION The ACC is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance to get the best print output. • You only need the printer gamma correction to fine-tune to meet user requirements. Use SP modes if you want to modify the printer gamma curve created with ACC. You can adjust the gamma data for the following: Highlight •...
  • Page 493 Image Adjustment - Adjustment Procedure - Copy the C-5Y chart in the mode that you want to adjust. Enter the SP mode. Select "System SP." Select SP4-918-009. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard (see the table below).
  • Page 494 Image Adjustment C-5Y chart. 5 K Highlight Adjust the offset value so that the color balance (Low ID) of black scale levels 3 through 5 in the copy is (C,M, and Y) seen as gray (no C, M, or Y should be visible). If <on the full the black scale contains C, M, or Y, do steps 1 to color copy>...

  • Page 495: Printer Mode

    Image Adjustment Item to Level on the C-5Y chart Adjustment Standard Adjust 1 ID max: (K) Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 13 matches that of level 13 on the C-5Y chart. 2 Middle Adjust the offset value so that the density of level (Middle ID) 7 matches that of level 7 on the C-5Y chart.

  • Page 496: Color Skew Adjustment

    Image Adjustment 2: 600 x 600 photo mode (2bit/4col) (Default) 3: 600 x 600 photo mode (1bit/4col) 4: 1200 x 1200 text mode (1bit/4col) 5: 600 x 600 text mode (4bit/4col) 6: 600 x 600 text mode (2bit/4col) 7: 600 x 600 text mode (1bit/4col) Execute SP1-103-001 to print out a color grayscale chart sheet if you want to examine the image quality for these settings.

  • Page 497: Remove The Paper Exit Tray [A]

    Image Adjustment is as follows: Turn ON the power and enter the SP mode. Select "System SP." Execute MUSIC (SP2-111-004). Check the result for each color with the following SPs. • SP2-117-004 (K) SP2-117-002 (C) • SP2-117-001 (M) • • SP2-117-003 (Y) If all of the SP values are within ±5, go to Step 9.
  • Page 498 Image Adjustment Turning the knob counter-clockwise by 90 degrees changes the SP value by +1. • Example: • SP value for magenta in Step 4 was “+6” Turn knob [C] 6 clicks (1 1/2 rotations) clockwise. SP value for yellow in Step 4 was “-7” Turn knob [D] 7 clicks (1 3/4 rotations) •...

  • Page 499: Open The Front Cover

    Image Adjustment Open the front cover. Remove the paper exit front cover, paper exit upper cover and paper exit tray. (Paper Exit Front Cover/Paper Exit Upper Cover/Paper Exit Tray for IM C400SRF) Remove the staple unit [A]. Rotate the knob(s) shown in the photo [A] to [D] at 90 degree intervals until the SP value for the affected color(s) is 0.
  • Page 500 Image Adjustment Make sure that the front door is closed, and execute execute MUSIC (SP2-111-004). Check the result for each color. Rotate the knob(s) shown in the photo [A] to [D] at 90 degree intervals until the SP value for the affected color(s) is within ±5 (target: 0).

  • Page 501: System Maintenance

    SYSTEM MAINTENANCE...

  • Page 503: Service Program Mode

    Service Program Mode 5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5.1.1 SP TABLES See "Appendices" for the following information: Service Program Mode • • SP Tables - SP1-XXX SP Tables - SP2-XXX • SP Tables - SP3-XXX • • SP Tables - SP4-XXX •...

  • Page 504: Overview Of Firmware Update

    Overview of Firmware Update 5.2 OVERVIEW OF FIRMWARE UPDATE 5.2.1 DIFFERENCE FROM PREVIOUS MACHINE In addition to an SD card, a USB flash drive can be used for the firmware update. Firmware • update from a USB flash drive can only be performed using the slot on the operation panel. When using the slot on the operation panel for the firmware update from removable media •...

  • Page 505: Firmware Types

    Overview of Firmware Update Removable media ARFU Individual firmware Available Available Firmware package Available Available Available Available *1 Not abailable for this machine. 5.2.3 FIRMWARE TYPES Firmware type Firmware location System/Copy Controller Board (PCB24) Engine BiCU (PCB1) Operation Panel Smart Operation Panel Bank Bank FCU (PCB2)
  • Page 506 Overview of Firmware Update Firmware type Firmware location Copy apl Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20) NetworkDocBox Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20) Fax apl Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20) Printer apl Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20) Scanner apl Smart Operation Panel –...

  • Page 507: Firmware Update (Removable Media)

    Firmware Update (Removable Media) 5.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE (REMOVABLE MEDIA) 5.3.1 OVERVIEW Removable media (SD card or USB flash drive) are a precision device, so when you • handle them, respect the following. When the power is switched ON, do not insert or remove the removable media. •...

  • Page 508: Using The Usb Flash Drive

    Firmware Update (Removable Media) Using the USB Flash Drive Use the USB slot [A] on the left side of the operation panel. 5.3.3 UPDATE PROCEDURE Preparation Download the latest version firmware to the removable media in advance. Create a folder called “package” on the removable media, and then download the package firmware (xxxxxxxx.pkg) to it.

  • Page 509: Using The Slot On The Back Of The Machine

    Firmware Update (Removable Media) Due to the above specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM module • number /software version of the PDF firmware at the PS location. Using the Slot on the Back of the Machine Turn OFF the main power. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot on the back of the machine.

  • Page 510: Using The Slot On The Operation Panel (Immediate Update)

    Firmware Update (Removable Media) After the data waiting screen is displayed, the update is automatically started. When the firmware update is complete, "Update done" is displayed. The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All items to be updated".
  • Page 511 Firmware Update (Removable Media) Touch [Media Update]. When the following screen is displayed, insert the removable media into the slot on the operation panel and touch [OK]. Touch [Execute]. Select the package, and then press [Execute]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 512: Using The Slot On The Operation Panel (Reserve)

    Firmware Update (Removable Media) After the data waiting screen is displayed, the update is automatically started. When the firmware update is complete, "Update done" is displayed. The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All items to be updated".
  • Page 513 Firmware Update (Removable Media) Touch [Media Update]. When the following screen is displayed, insert the removable media into the slot on the operation panel and touch [OK]. Touch [Execute]. Select the package, and then press [Execute]. 5-11 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 514 Firmware Update (Removable Media) Enter update date and time and specify the Retry Setting, then touch [Set]. In "Retry setting", it is set whether or not to retry when updating cannot be started depending on the state of the machine. When the following screen is displayed, pull out the removable media from the slot on the operation panel, and then touch [OK].

  • Page 515: Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)

    Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) 5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SMART FIRMWARE UPDATE) A HDD unit must be installed on the machine to enable the SFU or the package • firmware update via media device. 5.4.1 OVERVIEW Smart firmware update (SFU) is a system to download a firmware package. Since downloading the package takes time, SFU lets you schedule the download to take place when the machine is not in use, such as at night or at the weekend.
  • Page 516 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) Touch [Firmware Update]. Touch [Network Update]. Touch [Execute Update]. Touch [YES]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 5-14...
  • Page 517 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) The following will be displayed. • If the error code E66, which indicates that the download of the firmware has failed, is displayed, go back to step 1. The update will be started automatically after the download is finished. •...

  • Page 518: Update At The Next Visit (Reserve)

    Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All • items to be updated". 5.4.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE) It is possible to set the machine to download the package firmware which is necessary for SFU in advance, and then perform the actual installation at the next service visit.
  • Page 519 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) Touch [Firmware Update]. Touch [Reserve]. Touch [Reservation setting]. Enter the dates and times of the next visit and the start of receiving data. "Next time to visit this customer": The package firmware will be automatically •...
  • Page 520 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) When reservation update by the media device is set, the update date and time is displayed. In the two diagrams below, the firmware is set to be downloaded by the day before the next scheduled visit. In the first diagram, the download is successful on the first try.

  • Page 521: How To Check If The Firmware Downloaded With Reserve

    Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with Reserve Enter the SP mode. Touch [Firmware Update]. Touch [Reserve]. Touch [Reserved package information]. Check the information displayed. When the package firmware was downloaded successfully, the details of the download result are displayed as the following picture shows.

  • Page 522: How To Install Firmware Downloaded With Reserve

    Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) • This information will only be displayed if the reserved firmware has already been downloaded. If not, all the data items are indicated with "-". When reservation update by the media device is set, the package firmware •...
  • Page 523 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) Touch [Execute Update]. Check the version of the received package firmware, and then touch [YES]. • The update is started. • If the version of the reserved package in the HDD is older than the latest version, the messages shown in the following picture are displayed.
  • Page 524 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) The machine will automatically reboot itself. • • The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All items to be updated". D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 5-22...

  • Page 525: Firmware Update (Remote Firmware Update)

    Firmware Update (Remote Firmware Update) 5.5 FIRMWARE UPDATE (REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE) In this machine, the software can be updated by remote control using @Remote. 5.5.1 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION RFU is performable for a device which meets the following conditions. The customer consents to the use of RFU. The device is connected to a network via TCP/IP for @Remote.

  • Page 526: Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)

    Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) 5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE (AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE) Auto remote firmware update (ARFU) requires a connection to an external network. Be • sure to get permission from the customer before setting. • Internet connection is needed. 5.6.1 OVERVIEW Using Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU), the machine checks package firmware files on the global server every 76 hours.

  • Page 527: Downloading And Updating Process

    Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) 5.6.2 DOWNLOADING AND UPDATING PROCESS Downloads the Latest Package The machine accesses the server to check for latest package version. If the version of the package on the global server is later than that of the package installed on the machine, or if the machine has not downloaded the firmware package, the machine downloads the latest package in the background even when the customer is using the machine.
  • Page 528 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) has already been downloaded, the machine verifies whether a firmware update is necessary. If the timing of determination is within the update prohibition period or day set in the SP configuration or Web Image Monitor, the machine will retry the firmware update determination 76 hours later.
  • Page 529 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) Situations in which the machine is determined to be in use When the operation panel is used within 30 seconds During firmware update While firmware update is disabled While printing (copy, printer, fax, re-printing via network) While scanning (copy, scanner, fax) Retrieving image data via the network While initial setting ([Settings] icon) or SP is being set...

  • Page 530: Update Process

    Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) Situations in which the machine is determined to be in use While importing/exporting SP settings The interval between changing settings that require a reboot and actually rebooting (A reboot notification message pops up after changing the settings.) While verifying the operation panel (smart panel) Update Process When the machine updates the firmware by Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU), a...
  • Page 531 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) Using the operation panel, the user can cancel the update (including update through the retry process) being performed by Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU). However, while the firmware of the operation panel is being updated, cancellation is not possible because the keys are disabled.

  • Page 532: Related Sp

    Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) 5.6.3 RELATED SP SP Number Selection Overview Def. SP5-886-111 0: OFF Sets auto update ON/OFF by ARFU. 1: ON 0: OFF SP5-886-112 Will not run the update when update prohibited time setting is ON 1: ON and the current time is in the range of the time set.
  • Page 533 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) SP Number Selection Overview Def. most recent. The record is created when the update has successfully finished. When the update is canceled, no record is created. SP7-520-031 to Display History of the package number (including suffix) for which update only has completed.
  • Page 534 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) Result Description and SP5-886-115 (auto download setting for SFU) is enabled. Update prohibited time Cannot start to update as the auto-update prohibited time setting (SP5-886-112) is enabled and the time update initiated was in the range of prohibited time (SP5-886-113 to 114).
  • Page 535 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) Result Description failure when the proxy is set) version information. Update download error (proxy Cannot download or update as the proxy verification verification failure) failed with proxy settings when downloading the package. Update download error (other Cannot download or update as an error other than proxy than proxy verification failure verification with proxy settings occurred when...

  • Page 536: Firmware Update (Error Screens During Updating)

    Firmware Update (Error Screens During Updating) 5.7 FIRMWARE UPDATE (ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING) EXX shows an error code. For error codes, refer to the following table: Error Code List Code Contents Solutions Physical address mapping cannot be Switch the main power supply OFF and •...
  • Page 537 Firmware Update (Error Screens During Updating) Code Contents Solutions Replace the controller board (PCB24) if • the above solutions do not solve the problem. The removable media used after Insert the removable media containing the • download suspension is incorrect. same program as when the firmware Removable media is different between update was suspended, and then switch...
  • Page 538 Firmware Update (Error Screens During Updating) Code Contents Solutions to the destination for the main machine’s confirm that the removable media has program. been correctly mounted. • The removable media is incorrect if the program to be updated has been correctly installed.
  • Page 539 Firmware Update (Error Screens During Updating) Code Contents Solutions The removable media is damaged if the • update fails again. Replace the removable media. The data to be overwritten cannot be Switch the main power supply OFF and • accessed when controller-related ON to try again.
  • Page 540 Firmware Update (Error Screens During Updating) Code Contents Solutions the machine at the reserved date/time of the next reception time has elapsed. the remote firmware update from the network. Reception failed due to the status error Reset the reservation date/time for the •...
  • Page 541 Firmware Update (Error Screens During Updating) Code Contents Solutions If it persists, replace the hard disk. The amount of update data has • Move “fwu” in the “/romdata” directory out exceeded the limit. There is too much of that directory so that the same modules data in the removable media.

  • Page 542: Updating Javavm

    Updating JavaVM 5.8 UPDATING JAVAVM 5.8.1 OVERVIEW Updating Java VM is performed with a PC using the update tool. SD memory card reader/writer • Deactivate the SDK applications. Remove the VM Card Type M37 from the main machine. Update Java VM with the PC using the update tool. Insert the VM Card Type M37 in the main machine.

  • Page 543: Operation From Web Image Monitor

    Updating JavaVM 13. Turn the main power OFF. 14. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] (coin screw x 1). 15. Remove VM Card Type M37 from SD Card Slot 2 [A: Lower Slot]. Operation from Web Image Monitor Log in as the administrator from Web Image Monitor. Take a note of the current heap size setting in [Heap / Stack Size Settings].

  • Page 544: Updating Javavm And Inserting The Vm Card

    Updating JavaVM Remove the SD card slot cover [A] (Coin screw x 1). Remove VM Card Type M37 from SD Card Slot 2 [A: Lower Slot]. 5.8.3 UPDATING JAVAVM AND INSERTING THE VM CARD Insert VM Card Type M37 into the SD memory card reader/writer of the PC. Check that the SD memory card reader/writer is detected on the PC, and then write down the drive letter.

  • Page 545: Activating Sdk Applications

    Updating JavaVM reader/writer of the PC. 10. Insert VM Card Type M37 into SD Card Slot 2 (Lower slot) of the machine. 5.8.4 ACTIVATING SDK APPLICATIONS Make sure that the VM card is fully inserted, and then turn the main power ON. Log in as the machine administrator from Operation panel / Web Image Monitor.

  • Page 546: Nvram Data Upload/Download

    NVRAM Data Upload/Download 5.9 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD 5.9.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card. This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced. •...

  • Page 547: Downloading An Sd Card To Nvram

    NVRAM Data Upload/Download In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded. You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card. •...

  • Page 548: Address Book Upload/Download

    Address Book Upload/Download 5.10 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD 5.10.1 INFORMATION LIST The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded. Information Registration No. Select Title • • • User Code • Folder E-mail Local Authentication • • Protection Code Folder Authentication •...

  • Page 549: Upload

    Address Book Upload/Download Exit the SP mode, and then turn OFF the power. 10. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2 (lower). 11. Install the SD slot cover. • If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an error message is displayed.

  • Page 550: Smc List Card Save Function

    SMC List Card Save Function 5.11 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION 5.11.1 OVERVIEW The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the SD card inserted into the operation panel SD card slot. Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before exporting the SMC sheet •...
  • Page 551 SMC List Card Save Function Press [EXECUTE]. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving. “It is executing it” is shown on the screen while executing. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until “Completed” is shown. The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete. •...

  • Page 552: File Names Of The Saved Smc Lists

    SMC List Card Save Function 10. Press [Exit]. 11. Press [Exit] to exit from SP mode. 5.11.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS The SMC list data saved on the SD card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are as follows.

  • Page 553: Error Messages

    SMC List Card Save Function • A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this function is executed. This function can save the SMC list data only to an SD card inserted into the operation •...

  • Page 554: Capturing The Device Logs

    Capturing the Device Logs 5.12 CAPTURING THE DEVICE LOGS 5.12.1 OVERVIEW With this feature, you can save device logs that are stored in the machine (HDD or operation panel) on an SD card. It allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.

  • Page 555: Security Of The Operation Log

    Capturing the Device Logs Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum storage capacity) When the machine doors are opened during • normal operation FCU device log When a specified amount of FCU device log HDD or SD card • is stored in the FCU (PCB2). If fax connected to the service application is unavailable (e.g.

  • Page 556: Retrieving The Device Logs Via Operation Panel

    Capturing the Device Logs IP address • • Telephone number Encryption key • Transition to SP mode • 5.12.2 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA OPERATION PANEL Retrieve device logs to identify the date of occurrence of the problems and to find •...
  • Page 557 Capturing the Device Logs "20150201", as shown above. • Be sure to confirm the date when the problem occurred before obtaining the logs. Specify the number of days to collect the logs in SP5-858-102 (Days of Tracing). "2" is set by default, which is the minimum needed for investigating the problem. •...
  • Page 558 Capturing the Device Logs Error Description Code Other. No SD card is inserted in the service slot or in the SD slot on the side of the operation panel. In this case, insert an SD card into either of the SD slots. The SD card is locked.

  • Page 559: Retrieving The Device Logs Via Web Image Monitor

    Capturing the Device Logs 5.12.3 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA WEB IMAGE MONITOR The device logs can be retrieved via the Web Image Monitor. Access the following URL and logon as an administrator: http://[IP address or host name]/web/entry/df/websys/direct/getSysInfo.cgi Specify the date that the problem occurred and the number of days to download the logs. If the fax destinations need to be included in the fax information, set "On"...
  • Page 560 Capturing the Device Logs The confirmation screen will appear and the information and/or logs will start downloading. To proceed to download the information and/or logs, wait for the save or save and open dialog to appear. • To cancel downloading, click "Cancel". Operation panel when downloading the logs: •...
  • Page 561 Capturing the Device Logs Font List • • Error Log Fax information • • • SC 819 log 5-59 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 562: Up/Sp Data Import/Export

    Program (Fax function) • • Program (Printer function) Settings that can be specified via telnet • RICOH@Remote-related data • • Counters Settings that can only be specified via Web Image Monitor or Web Service (for example, • Bonjour, SSDP setting)

  • Page 563: Exporting Device Information

    UP/SP Data Import/Export Exporting Device Information This can be exported / imported by an administrator with all privileges. When exporting SP device information from the operation panel, the data is saved on an SD card. With the Copy/Printer/Scanner/Fax/Settings screen open, insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the operation panel.

  • Page 564: Importing Device Information

    UP/SP Data Import/Export Importing Device Information This can be exported / imported by an administrator with all privileges. Import device information saved on an SD card. With the Copy/Printer/Scanner/Fax/Settings screen open, insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the operation panel. Log in from the operation panel as an administrator with all privileges.

  • Page 565: Sp Data Import/Export

    UP/SP Data Import/Export 5.13.2 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT Data that can be imported and exported System SP • Printer SP • • Fax SP Scanner SP • Exporting Device Information When exporting SP device information from the operation panel, the data is saved on an SD card.

  • Page 566: Importing Device Information

    UP/SP Data Import/Export Item Specification Note Secret Secret information is exported if you Secret information select "Secret" setting. #1. Data that cannot be exported without being encrypted. (Exported data is encrypted.) Example: Password / Encryption key / PIN code #2. Confidential information for the customer Example: User name / User ID / Department code / Mail address / Phone...

  • Page 567: Possible Solutions For Import/Export Problems

    UP/SP Data Import/Export Select an encryption setting. Unique If you want to apply the unique information to the target Refer to the above machine, select the "Unique" key. information. Encryption If an encrypted file is selected as the import file, this setting is required.
  • Page 568 UP/SP Data Import/Export Result Code Cause Solutions ERROR) during import or export. and then try the operation again. If the error persists, contact your supervisor. 8 (DISK FULL) The available storage space on the Execute the operation again after external medium is insufficient. making sure there is enough storage space.

  • Page 569: Test Pattern Printing

    Test Pattern Printing 5.14 TEST PATTERN PRINTING Printing Test pattern: SP2-109 Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for design testing. Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, •...
  • Page 570 Test Pattern Printing • If you want to use black and white printing, touch "Black & White" on the LCD. If you want to use color printing, touch "Full Color" on the LCD. Press the "Start" key to start the test print. After checking the test pattern, touch "SP Mode"...

  • Page 571: Card Save Function

    Card Save Function 5.15 CARD SAVE FUNCTION 5.15.1 OVERVIEW Card Save: The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card • with no print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
  • Page 572 Card Save Function Select "Bit Switch 1 Settings" and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then press the "#" button to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By doing this, Card Save option will appear in the "List/Test Print" menu. Press [Exit] to exit SP Mode.
  • Page 573 Card Save Function 12. Press [Start] and then exit the "Settings" menu. 13. Press [Printer] icon. 14. "Card Save" is be displayed in the top left of the display panel. 15. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking. 16.

  • Page 574: Error Messages

    Card Save Function 5.15.3 ERROR MESSAGES Card Save error messages: Init error: A card save process (e.g. card detection, change to kernel mode) failed to • initialize. Card not found: Card cannot be detected in the slot. • No memory: Insufficient working memory to process the job. •...

  • Page 575: Troubleshooting

    Self-Diagnostic Mode 6. TROUBLESHOOTING 6.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the classification of the SC codes.

  • Page 576: Sc Logging

    Self-Diagnostic Mode Type Display How to reset SC call or SC alarm in customer support system operation panel. Only the SC history is updated. The machine Logging operates as count & usual. alarm count The SC is Turn the main power switch (SW1) OFF and ON. Occurrence displayed on the &...

  • Page 577: Sc Automatic Reboot

    Self-Diagnostic Mode 6.1.3 SC AUTOMATIC REBOOT When an ordinary SC (pattern D) is generated, automatically reboot is performed. Automatic reboot or reboot by user operation can be set by SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting out) (default value: 1 "OFF"). When a type D occurs, automatic reboot is done or the machine display asks the customer if it can reboot.
  • Page 578 Self-Diagnostic Mode D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 579: Sc Manual Reboot

    Self-Diagnostic Mode 6.1.4 SC MANUAL REBOOT When the automatic reboot is disabled in SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting), user reboot the machine manually. See the flowchart below. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 580: Sc1Xx: Scanning

    SC1xx: Scanning 6.2 SC1XX: SCANNING Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC101-01 D LED Error The peak white level is less than the prescribed value. This SC is detected when the machine adjusts the LED’s light intensity or before just scanning. Loose connector •...
  • Page 581 SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC101-02 D LED Error (LED illumination adjustment) The peak white level is less than the prescribed value. This SC is detected when the machine adjusts the LED’s light intensity. • Condensation in scanner unit •...
  • Page 582 SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) after each step. Reconnect the following connectors: • Scanner Carriage - BiCU harness (FFC) SBU (PCB11) - LEDB (scanner lamp board) harness (FFC) • connector Check the whit plate that is used for shading adjustment. This plate is attached to the back side of the sheet-through or platen exposure glass.
  • Page 583 SC1xx: Scanning SC No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC112-00 D LED Illumination Adjustment Error: Rear Side The white level peak reached the prescribed threshold when the white plate was scanned after a specified number of adjustments. • Loose connector •...
  • Page 584 SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC121-00 D Scanner Home Position Error 2 The Scanner HP Sensor (S20) did not go ON : During homing operation • During auto adjustment • • During document, book scanning Motor drive error •...
  • Page 585 SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC142-00 D White Level Detection Error The white peak level cannot be in the prescribed value when adjusting the scanner gain. This SC is detected when the scanner power is turned on and the machine returns from the energy saver mode.
  • Page 586 SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC144-00 D SBU Communication Error The machine cannot detect that the SBU (PCB11) is connected. Defective scanner carriage • Defective BiCU (PCB1) • • Loose connector or damaged harness Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
  • Page 587 SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC152-00 D White Level Correction Error: Rear Side The automatic adjustment has failed to correct the white level (rear side) to the permissible range. • Defective CIS (S21) • Defective BiCU (PCB1) Loose connector •...
  • Page 588 SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC161-20 D BiCU Error (DRAM initialization failure) The DRAM initialization flow is not completed successfully. This SC is detected when: the main power is turned ON and the machine returns from the energy saver mode. •...

  • Page 589: Sc2Xx: Exposure

    SC2xx: Exposure 6.3 SC2XX: EXPOSURE Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC202-01 D Polygon Motor Error 0: ON Timeout: K, C Polygon Motor Error 1: ON Timeout: M, Y SC202-03 D Polygon Mirror Motor (M5,M6) cannot rotate correctly. This SC is detected when the Polygon Mirror Motor (M5,M6) starts rotating, or its rotating speed is changed.
  • Page 590 SC2xx: Exposure Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Incorrect AC voltage • Cycle the power OFF/ON. Check the harness between Laser unit and BiCU (PCB1). Check CN300 (a connector with three pins) for the Polygon Mirror Motor (M5,M6) from the PSU (PCB16)(PCB17). There is no problem if the multimeter indicates 24±2V.
  • Page 591 SC2xx: Exposure Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC220-01 D Laser Synchronizing Detection Error: Start Position LD1: K/C SC220-03 D Laser Synchronizing Detection Error: Start Position LD1: M/Y Synchronizing detection signal cannot be received. This SC is detected when: •...
  • Page 592 SC2xx: Exposure Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC231-01 D FGATE OFF Error: K SC231-02 D FGATE OFF Error: C FGATE OFF Error: M SC231-03 D SC231-04 D FGATE OFF Error: Y FGATE signal is not OFF even when the laser is ready to end. This SC is detected when the machine is copying.
  • Page 593 Check the harness between LDB and BiCU (PCB1). Check the combination of BiCU (PCB1) and Laser unit. Check that the BiCU (PCB1) of an IM C300 is not being used with the laser unit of an IM C400 or vice versa.

  • Page 594: When Sc285-00 (Music Error) Is Displayed

    SC2xx: Exposure Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC285-00 MUSIC Error The results of MUSIC pattern reading failed 4 times. The ID sensors (S27-S29) cannot detect the MUSIC pattern Color registration error is larger than the specified value Refer to "When SC285-00 (MUSIC error) Is Displayed"...

  • Page 595: An Abnormal Value May Be Contained In The Sp Where The Music Corrected Result Is Saved

    SC2xx: Exposure An abnormal value may be contained in the SP where the MUSIC corrected result is saved. Execute SP2-180-001 (Line Pos. Adj.: Clear Color Regist.). Execute SP2-111-004 (Forced Line Position: Adj. Mode d). Check SP2-194-007 (MUSIC Execution Result: Execution Result). Execute MUSIC and check the result.

  • Page 596: Check If There Is No Problem Concerning The Mechanism (Interference Or Deformation)

    SC2xx: Exposure Follow the next step if executing SP2-111-004 (Forced Line Position: Adj. Mode d) and SP2-194-007 (MUSIC Execution Result: Execution Result) fails. Clean the ID Sensors (S27-S29). Check the harness and connector for ID Sensors (S27-S29). Replace the ID Sensors (S27-S29). Replace the BiCU (PCB1).

  • Page 597: Sc3Xx: Image Processing

    SC3xx: Image Processing 6.4 SC3XX: IMAGE PROCESSING Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Charge Roller Feed back Voltage Error: K SC312-01 D SC312-02 D Charge Roller Feed back Voltage Error: C SC312-03 D Charge Roller Feed back Voltage Error: M SC312-04 D Charge Roller Feed back Voltage Error: Y The feedback voltage of the charge AC for each color is 0.15V or less for...
  • Page 598 SC3xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC325-00 D Development Motor (CMY) Error Each lock signal is observed at 100ms intervals during motor ON, and the high level is detected 20 times consecutively. Defective Development Motor (CMY) (M9) •...
  • Page 599 SC3xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Drum Motor (K) Error SC396-00 D SC397-00 D Drum Motor (CMY) Error Each lock signal is observed at 100ms intervals during motor ON, and the high level is detected 20 times consecutively. •...
  • Page 600 SC3xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC360-01 D TD Sensor (Vt high) Error 1: K SC360-02 D TD Sensor (Vt high) Error 1: C TD Sensor (Vt high) Error 1: M SC360-03 D SC360-04 D TD Sensor (Vt high) Error 1: Y count is higher than the threshold which detects no developer •...
  • Page 601 SC3xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Check Vt with SP3-210-001 through -004. Check if Vt is higher than the upper threshold (specified in SP3-211-002). Incorrect: Vt is higher than the upper threshold Correct: Vt is equal to or lower than the upper threshold Troubleshooting procedure: Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON.
  • Page 602 SC3xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC362-01 D TD Sensor (Vt) Lower Limit Error 1: K SC362-02 D TD Sensor (Vt) Lower Limit Error 1: C TD Sensor (Vt) Lower Limit Error 1: M SC362-03 D SC362-04 D TD Sensor (Vt) Lower Limit Error 1: Y The machine detects that Vt (TD sensor output, SP3-210-001 to 004) is lower...
  • Page 603 SC3xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC370-00 D ID Sensor Calibration Error The reflection light output voltage of the ID Sensor (Vsg_reg) is not adjusted within the target range. Upper limit: Default: 4.5 V Lower limit: Default: 3.5 V Disconnected ID Sensor connectors •...
  • Page 604 SC3xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Scratches, toner filming, wavy belt, or insufficient cleaning Replace the ID Sensors (S27-S29). Check and connect the related harness if it is disconnected. Replace the BiCU (PCB1) if the SC cannot be recovered even after executing steps 1 to 6.

  • Page 605: Sc4Xx: Image Processing

    SC4xx: Image Processing 6.5 SC4XX: IMAGE PROCESSING Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC442-00 D ITB Lift Motor Error ITB Lift HP Sensor (S33) cannot detect the sensor feeler condition within a specified time even when the ITB Lift Motor (M14) rotates. •...
  • Page 606 SC4xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) First, cycle the main power OFF/ON to check if this SC occurs again. If this SC reoccurs, do the following: Remove and install the PCDU again to make sure that the PCDU is firmly set.
  • Page 607 SC4xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) BiCU malfunction (Signal error) • High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer) failure • Load related causes: Increased impedance in the paper transfer roller • Increased impedance in the ITB • • Open-circuit •...

  • Page 608: Sc5Xx: Paper Feed And Fusing

    Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC501-00 B 1st Paper Tray Error (IM C300 series only) This SC occurs if no paper is detected within the prescribed time when the tray is set correctly, and the tray lift motor starts rotating CW or CCW.
  • Page 609 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC501-02 1st Paper Tray Descent Error (IM C400 1st Tray Lift Motor (M15) descent error was detected for 5 times only) consecutively. • Loose, disconnected or damaged Tray Lift Sensor (S35) connector •...
  • Page 610 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Replace the PFU Tray Lift Motor (M2). Replace the harness. Replace the Controller Board (PCB1) in the tray. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC508-00 B Bypass Bottom Plate Error The signal from the Bypass Tray Lift Sensor (S4) does not change for two seconds after the bypass lift clutch was activated.
  • Page 611 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC524-01 D Paper Transport Motor (M12) Error (While the motor is OFF) When the motor is OFF, the each lock signal is checked every 100msec. This SC occurs if the LOW status is detected for 20 times consecutively. •...
  • Page 612 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) consecutively, the error count is reset Defective each fan • Disconnected harness • Loose connection • Defective BiCU (PCB1) • Replace the fan. Reconnect the fan connector. Replace the harness. Replace the BiCU (PCB1).
  • Page 613 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Error SC541-01 SC541-11 Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Error (Low Power) Broken Thermopile • Connector contact failure • Reconnect the connector between the fusing unit and BiCU (PCB1). Replace the Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Replace the harness between the fusing unit and BiCU (PCB1).
  • Page 614 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC542-03 A Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Reload Error SC542-13 D Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Reload Error (Low Power) Fusing Thermopile (TH1) has failed to reach the "permissible temperature for reloading" in 13 seconds after it detects 80 degrees C when: •...
  • Page 615 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC544-00 A Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Overheat (Hardware Error) Fusing Thermopile (TH1) detects a temperature of 250 degrees C. Triac short • • Defective BiCU (PCB1) • Defective fusing control system Inspect the Fusing Sleeve Belt Assembly.
  • Page 616 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC547-01 D Zero Cross Error (Fusing lamp relay contact welding) Zero cross signal is detected when the fusing relay is deactivated. Damaged fusing relay • Fusing relay drive circuit failure •...
  • Page 617 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC549-00 D Fusing Center Low Temperature After passing 60 seconds when FGATE is ON, the Fusing Thermopile (TH1) detects a temperature of -100 degrees C from the compensated target temperature for consecutive 60 seconds.
  • Page 618 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC557-00 C Zero Cross Frequency Error The frequency of the power source is 66Hz or more. This SC is detected just after the main power is turned ON. Noise (High frequency) •...
  • Page 619 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Replace the PSU (AC) (PCB17). Replace the fusing unit if all the above steps cannot resolve the issue. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC562-02 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) Cannot be Reloaded SC562-12 D Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) Cannot be Reloaded (Low Power)
  • Page 620 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC564-00 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) Overheat (Hardtware Error) Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) detects a temperature of 248 degrees C. • Shorted triac Defective BiCU (PCB1) •...
  • Page 621 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC572-02 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3) Cannot be Reloaded SC572-12 D Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3) Cannot be Reloaded (Low Power) Fusing temperature failed to reach a temperature of 45 degrees C when 100 seconds passes after starting a job where the paper width is wider than 206 mm AND is equal or smaller than 216 mm.
  • Page 622 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC574-00 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3) Overheat (Hardware Error) Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3) detects a temperature of 248 degrees C. Shorted triac • • Defective BiCU (PCB1) Defective fusing control system •...
  • Page 623 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC591-01 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2) Disconnection SC591-11 Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2) Disconnection (Low Power) Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2) detects a temperature of -20 degrees C or below for 29 consecutive seconds when the fusing lamp is activated.
  • Page 624 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC593-00 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2) High Temperature (Software Error) Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2) detects a temperature of 248 degrees C for consecutive 10 times when the fusing lamp is activated. •...

  • Page 625: Sc6Xx: Communication

    SC6xx: Communication 6.7 SC6XX: COMMUNICATION SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC621-00 D Finisher Communication Error An error signal is detected during communication between the finisher and the main machine. Connection error between finisher and main machine. • The finisher firmware is not properly updated. •...
  • Page 626 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC623-00 D Optional Paper Feed Unit 2 (Paper Tray 3) Communication Error An error signal is detected during communication between the optional paper feed unit and the main machine. Optional Paper Feed Unit 2 Main Board (PCB1) is defective. •...
  • Page 627 SC6xx: Communication SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC633-00 D Counter Device Error 2 After communication was established, the controller received the brake signal from the accounting device. Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier control board is disconnected or damaged.
  • Page 628 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC637-01 Tracking Information Notification Error (Tracking Application Error) Tracking information was lost. Tracking SDK application error • Internal notification error • Turn the main switch OFF and ON. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC637-02 Tracking Information Notification Error (Management Server Error) Tracking information was lost.
  • Page 629 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC645-01 C Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (K) SC645-02 C Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (M) Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (C) SC645-03 C SC645-04 C Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (Y) A communication error is received during EEPROM communication and the machine fails to recover even if the power is switched OFF and back ON for tagging.
  • Page 630 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC650-04 C Remote Service Modem Communication Error (dialup failing because of incorrect modem configuration) An error related to communication (dialup connection, modem board etc.) • using the RC Gate Type M was detected or an error that prevents RC Gate operation was detected at power on.
  • Page 631 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SP settings invalid • Modem connector disconnected • • Modem board disconnected Wireless LAN card disconnected • If a modem board is not installed, install it. • • Check again if the modem driver configurations (SP5-816-160, SP5-816-165 to 171, and SP5-816-165 to 171) are correct.
  • Page 632 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC652-00 A Remote Service ID2 Mismatching There was an authentication mismatch between ID2 for @Remote, the Controller Board (PCB24), and NVRAM. Used Controller Board installed • • Used NVRAM installed (This action is not allowed.) If this occurs during RC Gate installation: •...
  • Page 633 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC665-05 D BiCU Control Signal Connection Error (Master) SC665-07 D BiCU Control Signal Connection Error (IPU) BiCU Control Signal Connection Error (IOB) SC665-08 D When the machine starts or returns from the energy saver mode, a connection error signal between CPU and slave device is detected, or the machine cannot access all I/O IPU-ASICs correctly.
  • Page 634 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC665-71 D Macaron1 Connection Error (Continuous Detection) A communication error between the CPU and Macaron1 is detected during continuous detection. BiCU (PCB1) error (failure to mount the part, solder scrap, mounted part malfunction, etc.) Turn the main switch OFF and ON.
  • Page 635 SC6xx: Communication SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC669 EEPROM Communication Error SC669-01 D EEPROM OPEN: ID error EEPROM OPEN: Channel error SC669-02 D SC669-03 D EEPROM OPEN: Device error SC669-04 D EEPROM OPEN: Communication abort error SC669-05 D EEPROM OPEN: Communication timeout error SC669-06 D EEPROM OPEN: Operation stopped error...
  • Page 636 SC6xx: Communication SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step. Reconnect the EEPROM on the BiCU (PCB1).
  • Page 637 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) times. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step. Reconnect the BiCU (PCB1) and Controller board (PCB24). Replace the board in the following priority: BiCU (PCB1) PSU (PCB16) Controller board (PCB24)
  • Page 638 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC670-05 C Linkup Error If failing to link up by the 4th lane, the specified communication channel (and instead linking up by the 1st or 2nd lane) at the PCIe I/F connection between the controller and BiCU (PCB01) when the machine starts or returns from the energy saver mode.
  • Page 639 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) BiCU (PCB1). Check the connection of the Controller Board (PCB24). Replace the Controller Board (PCB24). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Controller Start Up Error SC672-10 D After the machine was powered ON, communication between the controller and the operation panel was not established.
  • Page 640 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC672-12 Controller Start Up Error Communication with controller was interrupted after a normal startup. Controller stalled • Board installed incorrectly • • Controller Board defective Operation panel connector loose, broken or defective •...
  • Page 641 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC672-20 D Controller Start Up Error After the machine was powered ON, communication between the controller and the operation panel was not established, or communication with controller was interrupted after a normal startup. Operation panel harness connection error Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON.
  • Page 642 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC672-99 Controller Start Up Error The operation panel software ended abnormally. Controller stalled • Board installed incorrectly • • Controller Board defective Operation panel connector loose, broken or defective • Controller late •...
  • Page 643 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) bent. If any of the pins are bent, replace the Toner Bottle Sensor Board (PCB7). Replace the toner bottle. Check the Toner Bottle Sensor Board (PCB7), and replace if damaged. Reattach the Toner Bottle Sensor Board (PCB7). Replace the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and toner bottle detection board.
  • Page 644 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC682-** D TD Sensor Communication Error TD Sensors (S14-S17) cannot be recovered after retrying three times for an ID Chip communication error. Corrupted ID data • • Disconnected ID Chip (PCB3-PCB6) No ID Chip (PCB3-PCB6) •...
  • Page 645 SC6xx: Communication Description Cause 682 01 - Invalid device ID Noise, Incorrect connection, Malfunction 06 - Channel error Noise, Incorrect connection, Malfunction 11 - Device Error Noise, Incorrect connection 16 - Communication error (interrupted) Noise, Incorrect connection 21 - Communication timeout Noise, Incorrect connection, Malfunction 26 -...

  • Page 646: Sc7Xx: Peripherals

    SC7xx: Peripherals 6.8 SC7XX: PERIPHERALS Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC724-03 D Protection Device Intercept Error 1 Failure to supply power to fuse and later circuits (parts) of finisher Main Board detected continuously for 2 seconds. Fuse open •...
  • Page 647 SC7xx: Peripherals Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) defects. Check if there is any unusual odor from each sensor or any problem with its appearance. Replace the sensor if there are any defects. Replace the finisher Main Board (PCB25). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC724-30 D...
  • Page 648 SC7xx: Peripherals Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC724-44 D Stapler Motor (M23) Error The Staple Tray Paper Sensor (S42) does not turn OFF even though the • Stapler Motor (M23) rotates with the specified number of pulses to move away from the home position.
  • Page 649 SC7xx: Peripherals Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) (M18) rotates with the specified number of pulses to move to the home position. (The first four times are displayed as jams. An SC is displayed when it is repeated five times.) Motor defective •...
  • Page 650 SC7xx: Peripherals Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step. Check if the harness between the finisher Main Board (PCB25) and the Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor (S44) / Exit Guide Plate Motor (M21) is not stripped or entrapped.
  • Page 651 SC7xx: Peripherals Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Check if there is any unusual odor from the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S37) or any problem with its appearance. Replace it if there are any defects. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Shift Roller Motor (M19) or any problem with its appearance.
  • Page 652 SC7xx: Peripherals Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC724-85 D Stopper Solenoid (SOL3) Error When the Stopper Solenoid (SOL3) lowers the actuator down to the • topmost paper of the paper stack, the Remaining Paper Sensor (S40) turns OFF. (The first four times are displayed as jams. An SC is displayed when it is repeated five times.) Stopper Solenoid (SOL3) defective •...

  • Page 653: Sc8Xx: Overall System

    SC8xx: Overall System 6.9 SC8XX: OVERALL SYSTEM Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC816-** [0x0000] Energy Save I/O Subsystem Error Subsystem error SC816-01 SC816-02 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error Transition to STR was denied. SC816-03 SC816-04 Interrupt in kernel communication driver Preparation for transition to STR failed.
  • Page 654 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step. Update the "System/Copy"...
  • Page 655 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) cycling the power after each step. Replace the HDD. Replace the memory device. Replace the Controller Board (PCB24). Fix the software. [0x5245] Link Up Error Link up transaction between Engine ASIC and Veena was not completed within 100 ms.
  • Page 656 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) and there was no error reply from the HDD. Power supply disconnection during data writing to the HDD. This SC may occur when turning ON the machine for the first time with a new HDD.
  • Page 657 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Overflow exception error [000C] [000D] UTLB miss exception error [0010] Interrupt line 0 error [0011] Interrupt line 1 error Interrupt line 2 error [0012] [0013] Interrupt line 3 error Interrupt line 4 error [0014] [0015] Interrupt line 5 error...
  • Page 658 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Replace the Controller Board (PCB24) Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostics Error: CPU SC820-00 [XXXX]: Detailed error code Interrupt line 0 mask exception error [060A] [060B] Interrupt line 1 mask exception error Interrupt line 2 mask exception error [060C] [060D]...
  • Page 659 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC820-00 Self-diagnostics Error: CPU [XXXX]: Detailed error code CPU Master Clock Error [06FF] Pipeline clock frequency ratio of CPU is different from specified value. CPU device error • Module bit that initializes the CPU is defective •...
  • Page 660 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Replace the Controller Board (PCB24). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostics Error: CPU SC820-00 D [XXXX]: Detailed error code [0706] Data Cache Capacity Error [0707] Data Cache Error [0708] Data Uncache Error Data in the data cache which is set in the primary data cache of the CPU is different from the contents of the pre-set...
  • Page 661 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostics Error: CPU SC820-00 [XXXX]: Detailed error code [4002] Single precision arithmetic error Double precision arithmetic error [4003] [4004] Exception error [4005] Exception mask error Error occurred during a calculation with the co-processor in the CPU. CPU device error Replace the Controller Board (PCB24).
  • Page 662 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) video bridge device. Defective I/F between the video bridge device and the controller Replace the Controller Board (PCB24). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostic Error: HDD SC822-00 D [xxxx]: Detailed error code [3003] HDD Timeout Check performed only when HDD is installed:...
  • Page 663 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC823-00 B Self-diagnostics Error: NIC [XXXX]: Detailed error code [6101] MAC Address Check Sum Error The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check sum stored in ROM. Defective SEEP ROM •...
  • Page 664 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC827-00 D Self-diagnostic Error: RAM [XXXX]: Detailed error code [0201] Resident Memory Verification Error Error detected during a write/verify check for the standard RAM*1 on Controller Board (PCB24). *1 Standard RAM on controller (2GB) in this machine is divided into the resident RAM (1GB) and the optional RAM (1GB).
  • Page 665 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) replace the RAM-DIMM). [0302] Optional Memory 0 Structural Error Every time the main power is turned ON, the structure of the optional RAM is checked. If an error is detected at this point, the self-diagnostic module will not check the optional RAM.
  • Page 666 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC834-00 D Self-diagnostic error: Optional memory [5101] Engine I/F optional memory verify error An error occurs after write/verify check for optional RAM on the engine I/F board (mother board). Defective memory device Replace the Engine I/F board (mother board).
  • Page 667 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC838-00 C Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator [xxxx]: Detailed error code [2701] Verify Error A verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock generator via the I2C bus. Defective clock generator •...
  • Page 668 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC842-00 C Nand-Flash Updating Verification Error SCS write error (verify error) occurred at the Nand-Flash module when remote ROM or main ROM was updated. Nand-Flash defective Turn the main power OFF/ON. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC842-01 C...
  • Page 669 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD or memory if the SC cannot be recovered by replacing the Controller Board (PCB24). Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC845-50 D DIMM or Hard Disk Failure This SC occurs if auto firmware decompression fails after downloading the package firmware during auto firmware update or receiving reservation setting in SFU.
  • Page 670 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC855-02 Wireless LAN Board Error (Driver initialization failure) Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered) Defective wireless LAN board • Loose connection • Cycle the main power OFF and ON. Replace wireless LAN board Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
  • Page 671 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC859-02 B Data Encryption Conversion HDD Conversion Error (Power failure during conversion) When the data encryption key was updated, HDD data was converted, but not correctly. Image displayed at conversion only (this SC is not displayed), but SC is displayed after machine is cycled off/on.
  • Page 672 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SS_COMMAND_ERROR:/* (-9)Drive not responding to command*/ • SS_KERNEL_ERROR:/* (-10)Internal kernel error*/ • • SS_SIZE_ERROR:/* (-11)Drive size too small*/ SS_NO._PARTITION:/* (-12)The specified partition does not exist*/ • SS_NO._FILE:/* (-13)Device file does not exist*/ •...
  • Page 673 SC8xx: Overall System Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC860-03 D HDD Encryption Key Error at Main Power On (HDD error) The encryption key for reading the encrypted hard disk data has failed. The controller’s ROM (NAND) and NVRAM are both damaged. (Rare) Be sure to back up the address book and retrieve the log before formatting the hard disk.
  • Page 674 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC863-02 HDD Data Read Failure to 23 The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "a" (SC863-02) to partition “v” (SC863-23)). Guide for when to replace the HDD When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.
  • Page 675 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC864-02 to HDD Data CRC Error During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query. Data transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the HDD.
  • Page 676 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC865-50 to HDD Time-out Error The machine does not detect a reply from the HDD during the HDD operation. SC865-50:The location where the error occurred cannot be identified. SC865-51: An error occurred outside of partition data area. SC865-52 to 73: An error occurred in partition "a"...

  • Page 677: Turn The Main Power Off And Check The Sd Card Insertion Status

    SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC867-02 B SD Card Removed The SD card was removed while the machine is on. An application SD card has been removed from the slot (mount point of /mnt/sd2). Cycle the main power OFF and ON. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC868-**...
  • Page 678 SC8xx: Overall System * Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only format SD cards used for Firmware Update by a Customer Engineer. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC870-00 B Address Book data error (Anytime: Address Book Error.) SC870-01 B...
  • Page 679 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from cache while SC870-32 B searching the WS-Scanner Address Book.) SC870-41 B Address Book data error (Cache: failed to obtain data from cache.) Address Book data error (On startup: Detected abnormality of the SC870-50 B Address Book encryption status.)
  • Page 680 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) the main power off/on. If SC occurs again, do the following steps. After installing the HDD, or SD/USB ROM, execute SP5-846-046. Wait more than 3 seconds, then execute SP5-832. Cycle the main power OFF and ON. Procedure after SC870 is cleared If there is backup data in SD card or Web Image Monitor, restore the address book data.
  • Page 681 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) When you do the above, the following information will be initialized. Sender’s mail text • • Default sender name/password (SMB/FTP/NCP) Administrator mail address • Scanner delivery history • Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC874-05 Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : Read error Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : Write error...
  • Page 682 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC875-01 D Bulk Data Erase Error (HDD erasure) (hddchack –i error) Bulk Data Erase Error (HDD erasure) (Data deletion failure) SC875-02 D An error was detected before HDD/data erasure starts. (Failed to erase data/failed to logically format HDD) HDD logical formatting failed.
  • Page 683 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC876-02 D Log Data Error 2 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation. Log encryption is enabled but encryption module is not installed. Replace or set again the encryption module.
  • Page 684 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) (SP5-832-004). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Log Data Error 99 SC876-99 D An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation.
  • Page 685 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) TPM Error SC878-02 An error occurred in either TPM or the TPM driver TPM not operating correctly Replace the Controller Board (PCB24). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) TCSD Error SC878-03 An error occurred in the TPM software stack.
  • Page 686 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC881-01 D Management Area Error A problem was detected in the software • This error may even occur is an IC card option is not installed. • This is caused by accumulation of abnormal authentication information in •...
  • Page 687 SC8xx: Overall System Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC899-00 Software Performance Error (signal reception end) Unknown software error occurred. Occurs when an internal program behaves abnormally. In the case of a hardware defect Replace the hardware. In the case of a software error Turn the main power OFF/ON.

  • Page 688: Sc9Xx: Others

    SC9xx: Others 6.10 SC9XX: OTHERS Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC900-00 A Electrical Total Counter Error The total counter contains data that is not a number. NVRAM incorrect type • NVRAM defective or corrupted • Unexpected error from external source •...
  • Page 689 SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC925-00 B NetFile Function Error SC925-01 B NetFile Function Error The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile management file is corrupted and operation cannot continue. The HDDs are defective and they cannot be debugged or partitioned, so the Scan Router functions (delivery of received faxes, document capture, etc.), Web services, and other network functions cannot be used.
  • Page 690 SC9xx: Others Before you initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD, tell the customer: • Received faxes on the delivery server will be erased All captured documents will be erased • Desk Top Binder/Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor job history will be erased •...
  • Page 691 SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) main power OFF and then back ON. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step. Reconnect the connector to the BiCU (PCB1). Take care not to bend the connector pins when reconnecting the connector.
  • Page 692 SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC940-04 C Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1) Malfunction (when not operating) This SC occurs if the value of the register of the error detection signal is zero three times in a row when the Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1) is not operating. Connector disconnected •...
  • Page 693 SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Take care not to bend the connector pins when reconnecting the connector. Replace the Duplex Clutch (CL6). Replace the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and Duplex Clutch (CL6). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC940-08 C ITB Lift Motor (M14) Malfunction (when not operating) This SC occurs if the value of the register of the error detection signal is zero...
  • Page 694 SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Toner Supply Motor (M1-M4) is malfunctioning. • Toner Supply Motor driver is malfunctioning. • • The interlock switch is OFF. Check if the SC occurs by executing two-sided printing after turning the main power OFF and then back ON.
  • Page 695 SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Replace the Paper Feed Clutch (CL9). Replace the BiCU (PCB1). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC940-53 C Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) Malfunction (during operation) This SC occurs if the value of the register of the error detection signal is zero three times in a row when the Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) is operating.
  • Page 696 SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC940-56 C Duplex Clutch (CL6) Malfunction (during operation) This SC occurs if the value of the register of the error detection signal is zero three times in a row when the Duplex Clutch (CL6) is operating. The Duplex Clutch (CL6) driver is malfunctioning.
  • Page 697 SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Replace the BiCU (PCB1). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC940-85 D Load SW (5V_IO): Overcurrent Detection The load SW has detected and limited overcurrent. One of the following units or the harness connected to it has shorted: •...
  • Page 698 SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC940-86 D Load SW (5V_SCN1): Overcurrent Detection The load SW has detected and limited overcurrent. One of the following units or the harness connected to it has shorted: BiCU (PCB1) • •...
  • Page 699 SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC990-00 Software Operation Error Software attempted an unexpected operation. Parameter error • • Internal parameter error • Insufficient work memory Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable. • Cycle the main power OFF/ON. Reinstall the software of the controller and BiCU (PCB1).
  • Page 700 SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC997-00 D Application Function Selection Error The application has not responded to the set command created by SCS • within a certain period of time. The application selected ended abnormally. • Software bug Check whether an option required by the application (RAM, DIMM, board) is installed properly.

  • Page 701: Process Control Error Conditions

    Process Control Error Conditions 6.11 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS 6.11.1 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT Displayed number shows results of each color sensor check. 00000000 = YYCCMMKK Result Description Possible Causes/Action Successfully Process control self-check Check the Vsg adjustment. completed successfully completed. See the "Vsg Adjustment Result"...
  • Page 702 Process Control Error Conditions Result Description Possible Causes/Action (S27-S29). Replace the BiCU (PCB1). ID sensors (S27-S29) • are dirty: Clean the ID sensors (S27-S29). Retry the process control. ID sensor coefficient When the K5 is more than the ID sensor pattern density •...

  • Page 703: Vsg Adjustment Result

    Process Control Error Conditions Result Description Possible Causes/Action Check the power source. Vsg Adjustment Result Result Description Possible Causes/Action Vsg adjustment is correctly done. ID sensor Vsg cannot be adjusted within 4.0 • Dirty ID sensors (S27-S29) adjustment error ±0.5V. (toner, dust, or foreign material) Dirty transfer belt...

  • Page 704: Line Position Adjustment Result

    Process Control Error Conditions 6.11.2 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT SP2-194-010 to -012 (Line Position Adjustment Result: M, C, Y) This SP shows the number as a line position adjustment result on the LCD. It shows which color has an error (M, Y or C). Result Description Note...

  • Page 705: Troubleshooting For Image Quality Problems

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems 6.12 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEMS 6.12.1 FLOWCHART FOR IDENTIFYING UNIT CAUSING IMAGE QUALITY DEGRADATION (PROBLEM AT REGULAR INTERVALS) 6-131 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 706: Enter The Sp Mode, And Then Select Sp2-109-003

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems Image problems may appear at regular intervals that depend on the circumference of certain components. The following diagram shows the possible symptoms (black or white dots at regular intervals). [A]: Paper feed direction [B]: Problems at regular intervals Enter the SP mode, and then select SP2-109-003.

  • Page 707: Only Black Is Not Printed

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems Interval Target part Replacement part Roller R (pitch) (phi) 749.9mm Fusing sleeve belt PCDU (Photo Conductor and Pressure roller Development Unit) (CMY) Image transfer belt PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit) Assembly, or Fusing Sleeve Belt Fusing Unit Pressure...

  • Page 708: Set The Itb Contact/Release Lever To The Proper Position

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems Set the ITB contact/release lever to the proper position. [A]: The lever is set to the proper position. [B]: The lever is not set to the proper position. 6.12.3 MISRECOGNITION OF AUTO COLOR SELECTION WHEN SCANNING ORIGINALS In Auto Color Selection (ACS) mode, 2 processes are carried out, namely (1) Chromatic Color Recognition and (2) Size Recognition, to determine...

  • Page 709: Recognizing Whether The Original Is Full Color Or Black-And-White

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems By (2) Size Recognition, whether the original is recognized as full color or black-and-white depends on the continuity of the chromatic color in (1) Chromatic Color Recognition. The original is recognized to be full color only if chromatic color pixels are detected continually. If interspersed minute chromatic color pixels are detected (as shown below), the original is not recognized as a full color original.

  • Page 710: Color Recognition For Recognizing Whether The Original Is Full Color Or Black-And-White

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems Using SP4-939-001 (ACS:Color Range), you can adjust the level of (1) Chromatic Color Recognition for recognizing whether the original is full color or black-and-white. This is the SP for both copier and scanner settings, and you can adjust this setting with the 5-level scale from -2 to 2 (Default: 0).

  • Page 711: The Misrecognition Occurs When Scanning An Original Which Has Color Only 15 Mm From The Edge (Using The Original As A Standard) In The Acs Mode

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems The misrecognition occurs when scanning an original which has color only 15 mm from the edge (using the original as a standard) in the ACS mode. Cause In the ACS mode, the edge of the original is not recognized. Only the center part of the original document is the target area to recognize color or monochrome (in order to prevent misrecognition due to noise).
  • Page 712 Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems [A]: Sub scan direction: leading edge (left) [B]: Main scan direction (front) [C]: Sub scan direction: leading edge (right) [D]: Main scan direction (rear) [E]: Paper [F]: ACS area excluded from recognition • Because the edge of the original is subject to noise, color misrecognition may occur after setting these SPs smaller than the defaults.

  • Page 713: Failure To Reproduce Colored Text During Color Copying6-139

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems 6.12.5 FAILURE TO REPRODUCE COLORED TEXT DURING COLOR COPYING Some colored text is printed in black. Condition This occurs when copying an original including faintly colored text or dark colored text in Full Color / Auto Color Selection / Two-Color mode. (The following figure shows an example of colored text being printed in black.) This occurs when copying an original with an image visible from the other side (colored text printed on the paper with relatively thick-colored photos or graphs) in Full Color / Auto Color...
  • Page 714 Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems Cause In the copier image processing, text areas and color areas are extracted from the scanned image of the original. This extraction is called “image area separation”. The area recognized as black text (text area and black and white area) is printed in black only.

  • Page 715: Line Position Adjustment

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems Select the [Color Quality] tab, and then set the value in [Text/Photo Sensitivity] closest to [Photo]. 6.12.6 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT When there are color registration errors on the output, do the line position adjustment as follows.

  • Page 716: Countermeasure List For Color Registration Errors

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems Countermeasure List for Color Registration Errors After Executing SP2-111-003 Result: "1" in SP2-194-007 • • Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012 Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure White image, Abnormal image, •...
  • Page 717 Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure output. Deformed center area on the • image transfer belt • Defective BiCU (PCB1) Replace the ID sensors (S27-S29). Replace the image transfer belt. Replace the BiCU (PCB1). The skew for M, C, Y, K is more than ±0.75 mm. Defective PCDU •...
  • Page 718 Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Replace the high-voltage power supply unit (PCB22)(PCB23). Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some toner (SP3-030-xxx). Replace the BiCU (PCB1). Normal image, but with color Defective ID sensor shutter registration errors Defective ID sensors (S27-S29) Defective BiCU (PCB1)
  • Page 719 Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure the end of the scan line? Defective laser optics housing unit • Defective BiCU (PCB1) • Perform the color skew adjustment (Image Adjustment). Reinstall or replace the PCDU. Replace the laser optics housing unit. Replace the BiCU (PCB1).

  • Page 720: Blank Print

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure The sub scan registrations of M, C, Y, K are Defective image transfer belt • shifted. Defective drive units • • Defective ID sensors (S27-S29) Defective BiCU (PCB1) • Incorrect SP value •...

  • Page 721: All-Black Print

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems 6.12.8 ALL-BLACK PRINT Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions All the paper is black. Incorrectly installed PCDU Install the PCDU correctly. Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU. Defective HVPS Replace the HVPS. Defective laser unit Replace the laser unit. Defective BiCU (PCB1) Replace the BiCU (PCB1).

  • Page 722: Repeated Spots Or Lines On Prints

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems 6.12.11 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS The same spots or lines appear at regular intervals. Interval Possible cause Necessary actions At intervals of 33.6 mm (1.32 inches) Defective charge Replace the PCDU. roller At intervals of 20.9 mm (0.82 inches) Defective Replace the PCDU.

  • Page 723: Missing Parts Of Images

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems 6.12.14 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Some parts of images are Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU. missing. Defective image transfer belt Replace the image transfer belt unit unit. Defective paper transfer Replace the paper transfer roller roller.

  • Page 724: Unfused Or Partially Fused Prints

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions They get weaker and weaker. Defective Replace the transfer unit transfer unit. 6.12.20 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Some parts of images are not Non-standard paper in Use recommended paper.

  • Page 725: Background Stain

    Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems 6.12.22 BACKGROUND STAIN Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions The reverse side of the paper is not Dirty paper transfer Clean the paper transfer clean. roller roller. Dirty paper path Clean the paper path. Dirty registration roller Clean the registration roller.

  • Page 726: Troubleshooting For Other Problems

    Troubleshooting for Other Problems 6.13 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR OTHER PROBLEMS 6.13.1 WHEN YOU CANNOT OPEN THE RIGHT DOOR Problem: The right cover (duplex unit) does not open, even if the opening/closing lever is operated. Causes: When replacing parts, for example, the duplex unit, hooking the hook band [A] has been forgotten, so the opening/closing lever and the duplex hook parts do not work together.
  • Page 727 Troubleshooting for Other Problems IM C400series Remove the cover [A]. Remove the interlock switch cover [A]. IM C300series IM C400series Remove the bracket. ( ×1) 6-153 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 728 Troubleshooting for Other Problems IM C300series IM C400series Release the hook [A] from the hole where the bracket was removed. IM C300series D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 6-154...

  • Page 729: When Fluorescent Or Led Lamps Flicker

    Troubleshooting for Other Problems IM C400series 6.13.2 WHEN FLUORESCENT OR LED LAMPS FLICKER Problem: Under the usage environment of this machine, at the placement location, fluorescent and/or LED lamps flicker. Causes: This is a result of the voltage drop that occurs when power is applied to the fusing lamp. It depends on the electrical power environment at the customer's location.
  • Page 730 Troubleshooting for Other Problems Timing Solutions Side Effect Set SP1-135-001 (Inrush Recovery time from energy saving becomes Recovery Control) to "1 (ON)." slower approx. 0.9 sec. from energy saving Set SP1-135-001 (Inrush • Recovery time from energy saving becomes After the recovery from Control) to "1 (ON)."...

  • Page 731: When Abnormal Noise Occurs

    Troubleshooting for Other Problems SP Name SP No. Value Temp.:Plain2:BW:Center Print Target SP1-105-009 Temp.:Thin:FC:Center Print Target SP1-105-011 Temp.:Thin:BW:Center Print Target SP1-105-013 Temp.:M-thick:FC:Center Print Target SP1-105-015 Temp.:M-thick:BW:Center 6.13.3 WHEN ABNORMAL NOISE OCCURS When abnormal noise occurs while the machine is operating, identify where the noise comes from by using various output checks.
  • Page 732 Troubleshooting for Other Problems D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 6-158...
  • Page 733 Initial value: 20 sec. Time SP1-158-004 Abnormal Noise Line speed at the time of Confirmation: Operation rotation Line Speed IM C300 series 0: 89 mm/s 1: 178 mm/s 2: 178 mm/s 3: 178 mm/s IM C400 series 0: 89 mm/s...

  • Page 734: Electrical Component Defects

    Electrical Component Defects 6.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS 6.14.1 SENSORS Sensor Name/ Activ CN No./ Conditi Symptom Sensor Board Pin No. Name Duplex entrance CN523/15 Open Jam Z (Jam sensor (S1) Shorted Jam Z (Jam Duplex exit sensor CN523/25 Open Jam Z (Jam (S2) Shorted Jam Z...
  • Page 735 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Activ CN No./ Conditi Symptom Sensor Board Pin No. Name (S8) Shorted Jam C New fusing unit CN525/34 Open A new fusing detection fuse unit is (S9) erroneously identified as an old one. Shorted A shorted fuse Fusing thermistor CN525/27...
  • Page 736 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Activ CN No./ Conditi Symptom Sensor Board Pin No. Name image. SC498 • ADF position CN403/2 Open ADF open sensor (S19) cannot be Shorted detected. Scanner HP CN403/5 Open SC120, sensor (S20) SC121 Shorted CIS (S21) CN401/1,2,3,5 Open SC154 (CIS...
  • Page 737 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Activ CN No./ Conditi Symptom Sensor Board Pin No. Name ID sensor (front) CN555/3 Open SC370 (S27) Shorted ID sensor (center) CN555/7 Open SC370 (S28) Shorted ID sensor (rear) CN555/12 Open SC370 (S29) Shorted Tray paper end CN571/8 Open Paper end is...
  • Page 738 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Activ CN No./ Conditi Symptom Sensor Board Pin No. Name Waste toner full CN571/14 Open Waste toner sensor (S36) full is detected when it is not near full. Shorted Waste toner full cannot be detected when the waste toner bottle is...

  • Page 739: Fuse Location

    Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Active CN No./ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Pin No. SN1 Shift roller HP sensor CN109/2 Open SC724-82 (S37) Shorted SN2 Gathering roller HP CN109/5 Open SC724-80 sensor (S38) Shorted SN3 Tray lower limit sensor CN113/2 Open The paper exit tray is erroneously...
  • Page 740 250V 11071241 TCL-15A-N4 fusing circuit in the PSU (PCB16)) FU103 CN600-4,5 250V 11071362 SCT2A (Anti-condensation Heater (H1)) The photograph shows an example using the IM C300 series. The fuse position is the same for the IM C400 series. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 6-166...

  • Page 741: Jam Detection

    Jam Detection 6.15 JAM DETECTION 6.15.1 PAPER JAM HISTORY Plotter (print engine) jam history can be displayed using SP7-507. The jam history of the 10 latest jams is displayed. SP7-507-001 "Plotter Jam: History Latest" • • SP7-507-002 "Plotter Jam: History Latest1" SP7-507-003 "Plotter Jam: History Latest2"...
  • Page 742 Jam Detection D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 6-168...
  • Page 743 Jam Detection Cause Cause of jam Late Stay Display code code Registration sensor (S24) Fusing entrance sensor (S3) Fusing exit sensor (S8) Paper exit sensor (S7) Duplex entrance sensor (S1) Duplex exit sensor (S2) Paper transport sensor 1 (S1) Paper transport sensor 2 (S1) Paper transport sensor 3 (S1) 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor Initial jam at power on: Entrance sensor (SN9)
  • Page 744 Jam Detection Cause Cause of jam Late Stay Display code code on the registration roller (when paper is fed from optional paper feed units). Cannot make the paper slack for skew adjustment on the registration roller (when paper is fed from 1st tray).
  • Page 745 Internal finisher stapler motor (M23) jam Internal finisher stopper solenoid (SOL3) jam Main Machine Data Corrupt *1 IM C300 series only *2 IM C400 series only *3 Basic model (IM C300/C300F/C400F) only *4 Finisher model (IM C400SRF) only Cause Cause of jam Late...

  • Page 746: Sensor Layout

    Jam Detection Sensor Layout D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 6-172...
  • Page 747 Jam Detection 6-173 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 748 Jam Detection Callout Sensor Callout Sensor 1-Bin Tray Paper Remaining Sensor [K] Paper end sensor (bypass) (S6) 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor Paper transport sensor 1 (S1) Paper exit sensor (S7) Paper transport sensor 2 (S1) Fusing exit sensor (S8) Paper end sensor (S2) Fusing entrance sensor (S3) Remaining paper sensor (S3) Registration sensor (S32)

  • Page 749: Paper Size Code

    Jam Detection Paper Size Code Size Code Paper Size Size Code Paper Size A4 LEF B4 SEF A5 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF DLT SEF LT LEF LG SEF HLT LEF LT SEF A4 SEF HLT SEF A5 SEF Others 6-175 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 751: Detailed Descriptions

    DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS...

  • Page 753: Machine Overview

    Machine Overview 7. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 7.1 MACHINE OVERVIEW 7.1.1 OVERVIEW IM C300 series D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 754 Machine Overview IM C400F D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 755 Machine Overview IM C400SRF Callout Item Callout Item Paper feed tray Scanner unit Waste toner bottle Paper exit unit ITB unit Fusing unit PCDU Duplex unit Toner bottle Paper transfer roller Laser unit Registration roller Internal finisher Bypass feed tray D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 756: Paper Path

    Machine Overview 7.1.2 PAPER PATH IM C300 series D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 757 Machine Overview IM C400F D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 758 Machine Overview IM C400SRF Callout Item Callout Item ADF transport path Optional paper feed unit path (1st) 1-Bin tray path*1 Optional paper feed unit path (2nd) Duplex paper transport path Standard paper tray path Bypass paper feed path Optional paper feed unit path (3rd) *1 IM C 300 series/C400F are optional.

  • Page 759: Drive Layout

    Machine Overview 7.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT IM C300 series IM C400F D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 760 Machine Overview IM C400SRF Callout Item Callout Item Scanner Motor (M7) Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) Paper Exit Clutch (CL3) Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1) Reverse Clutch (CL2) Paper Transport Motor (M12) Development Clutch(K) (CL5) Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) Drum Motor (M11) Duplex Clutch (CL6) Drum Motor (CMY) (M10) Registration Clutch (CL8)

  • Page 761: Component Layout

    Machine Overview 7.1.4 COMPONENT LAYOUT The descriptions of the IM C400 series are accompanied by illustrations of the IM C400SRF. Scanner Unit / Laser Unit / Others IM C300 series D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 762 Machine Overview IM C400 series Callout Item Callout Item Scanner Lamp Scanner Motor (M7) SBU (PCB11) Polygon Mirror Motor (M/Y) (M6) Scanner HP Sensor (S20) Imaging Temperature Sensor (TH5) Polygon Mirror Motor (K/C) (M5) Temperature/humidity Sensor (S18) LD Drive Board (K/C) (PCB8) Interlock Switch ADF Position Sensor (S19) Operation Panel...

  • Page 763: Internal Finisher

    Machine Overview Internal Finisher Callout Item Callout Item Main Board (PCB25) Stopper Solenoid (SOL3) Tray Lift Motor (M22) Exit Guide Plate Motor (M21) Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S39) Interlock Switch (SW3) Remaining paper sensor (S40) Callout Item Callout Item Gathering Roller HP Sensor (S38) Paper Exit Sensor (S43) Gathering Roller Motor (M18) Entrance Sensor (S45)
  • Page 764 Machine Overview Paper Feed IM C300 series Callout Item Callout Item Tray Lift Motor (M15) Registration Sensor (S32) Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) Bypass Paper Width Sensor (S5) Registration Clutch (CL8) Paper Feed Sensor (S31) Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) Bypass Tray Lift Sensor (S4)

  • Page 765: Paper Feed

    Machine Overview IM C400 series Callout Item Callout Item Tray Lift Motor (M15) Registration Sensor (S32) Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) Bypass Paper Width Sensor (S5) Registration Clutch (CL8) Paper Feed Sensor (S31) Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) Bypass Tray Lift Sensor (S4) Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1) Tray Paper End Sensor (Main Unit) (S30) Tray Lift Sensor (S35)

  • Page 766: Paper Exit / Duplex / Waste Toner

    Machine Overview Paper Exit / Duplex / Waste Toner IM C300 series IM C400 series Callout Item Callout Item Reverse Clutch (CL2) Paper Exit Sensor (S7) Paper Exit Clutch (CL3) Duplex Exit Sensor (S2) Duplex Entrance Sensor (S1) Waste Toner Full Sensor (S36)

  • Page 767: Fusing

    Machine Overview Fusing IM C300 series IM C400 series 7-15 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 768 Machine Overview Callout Item Callout Item Fusing Thermostat Pressure Roller Thermistor (Edge: front) (TH2) Fusing Heater Fusing Exit Sensor (S8) Fusing Thermistor (Non-contact Fusing Entrance Sensor (S3) Sensor) (S10) Pressure Roller Thermistor (Edge: Fusing Thermopile (TH1) rear) (TH3) Pressure Roller Thermistor (Edge: center) (TH4) D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 7-16...

  • Page 769: Development Unit / Itb/ Paper Transfer

    Machine Overview Development Unit / ITB/ Paper Transfer IM C300 series IM C400 series 7-17 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 770 Machine Overview Callout Item Callout Item toner bottle sensor board (PCB7) ITB lift HP sensor (S33) toner supply motor (K) (M1) ITB lift motor (M14) toner end sensor (C) (S11) ID sensor (S27-S29) toner supply motor (C) (M2) ID sensor shutter solenoid (SOL2) toner end sensor (M) (S12) TD sensor (Y) (S17) toner supply motor (M) (M3)

  • Page 771: Drive Unit

    Machine Overview Drive Unit IM C300 series IM C400 series Callout Item Callout Item Fusing Motor (M13) Drum Motor (CMY) (M10) Paper Transport Motor (M12) Drum Motor (M11) Development Motor (CMY) (M9) Development Clutch(K) (CL5) 7-19 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 772: Electrical Parts

    Machine Overview Electrical Parts IM C300 series IM C400 series D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 7-20...
  • Page 773 Machine Overview Callout Item Callout Item Fusing Unit Cooling Fan (FAN1) PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4) High-Voltage Power Supply PSU AC (PCB17) (Development) (PCB22) LD Unit Cooling Fan (FAN2) High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer) (PCB23) PCDU Cooling Fan (FAN3) PSU DC (PCB16) Controller Board (PCB24) BiCU (PCB1) Paper Exit Exhaust Fan (FAN5)

  • Page 774: Adf Unit

    ADF Unit 7.2 ADF UNIT 7.2.1 OVERVIEW Name Name Original tray Registration sensor (S24) ADF top cover sensor (S23) Scanning guide plate (front side) Original set sensor (S22) Pre-scanning roller (rear side) Pick-up roller Scanning guide plate (rear side) Original set sensor actuator CIS (S21) Stopper ADF exit roller...
  • Page 775 ADF Unit Name Name Original feed clutch (CL4) ADF relay board (PCB13) Original feed sensor (S25) ADF motor (M8) Registration sensor (S24) ADF top cover sensor (S23) CIS (S21) Original set sensor (S22) The ADF of this machine does not have an automatic size detection function because •...

  • Page 776: Original Transport Drive

    ADF Unit 7.2.2 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT DRIVE The ADF motor (M8) [A] drives all ADF rollers via gears. The original feed clutch (CL4) [B] controls the mechanism for picking up the original. 7.2.3 ORIGINAL SET DETECTION When an original [A] is placed on the original tray correctly, the original set sensor actuator [B] is pushed up and the original set sensor (S22) [C] turns off (not interrupted).

  • Page 777: Original Transport Path

    ADF Unit 7.2.4 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT PATH When [Start] is pressed, the original feed clutch (CL4) is turned ON. Then the feed roller [A] rotates to drop the pick-up roller [B] onto the top original of the stack. This moves the stopper [E] out of the way, and the original can be fed from the feed roller [A] to the ADF entrance roller [C].
  • Page 778 ADF Unit The original is fed by the ADF entrance roller [A] and the pre-scanning (front side) roller [B], scanned on the exposure glass under the scanning guide plate (front side) [C], and then delivered by the pre-scanning (rear side) roller [D]. The feeding of the original is detected by registration sensor (S24) [E].

  • Page 779: Double-Feed Detection (Optional)

    ADF Unit 7.2.5 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION (OPTIONAL) A pair of ultrasound sensors are mounted in the ADF, one below the original feed path (emitter [A]) and the other above the path (receiver [B]). When the original passes between the sensors, an ultra-sound wave from the emitter •...
  • Page 780 ADF Unit This double feed detection will not function with originals that have: • Folds, wrinkles, tears Holes • Imperfectly fused images • • Perforations Taped connections • Taped surfaces • Feeding such originals could cause false detection of double-feeds. The service technician can also switch double-feed detection OFF/ON with SP6-040-001 (Page Keeper: Mount Select, Default 0: Off).

  • Page 781: Scanner Unit

    Scanner Unit 7.3 SCANNER UNIT 7.3.1 OVERVIEW Callout Item Callout Item Exposure Glass (for ADF) ADF Position Sensor (S19) Exposure Glass (for platen mode) Scanner Carriage Drive Belt Scanner HP Sensor (S20) Scanner Motor (M7) Scanner Carriage Automatic paper size detection is not available because this model has no APS •...
  • Page 782 Scanner Unit Callout Item Callout Item LED array board (LEDB) 4th mirror Light guiding panel 5th mirror Reflectors Lens 1st mirror 2nd mirror Light Path 3rd mirror D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 7-30...

  • Page 783: Scanner Carriage Drive

    Scanner Unit 7.3.3 SCANNER CARRIAGE DRIVE The scanner motor (M7) [B] drives the drive belt [D] in order to move the scanner carriage [A] along the guide rod [C]. Scanning starts with the scanner carriage [A] at the scanner HP sensor (S20) [E]. After scanning, the scanner carriage returns to the scanner HP sensor (S20) .

  • Page 784: Improved Tolerance To Black Lines When Paper Passes Through Adf

    Scanner Unit 7.3.4 IMPROVED TOLERANCE TO BLACK LINES WHEN PAPER PASSES THROUGH ADF This model uses a conventional mechanism in which paper comes in contact with the exposure glass during feeding. This is useful for dealing with adhesion of free dirt particles (paper scraps, etc.).

  • Page 785: Scanning Position Correction

    Scanner Unit 7.3.5 SCANNING POSITION CORRECTION By changing SP4-020-001 (Dust Check Dust Detect:On/Off), when dirt is detected at the scanning position, the scanning position may be changed to avoid the dirt. (If it cannot be avoided, an alert is displayed on the operation panel advising the user to perform target glass cleaning).

  • Page 786: Overview

    Internal Finisher 7.4 INTERNAL FINISHER 7.4.1 OVERVIEW Item Specifications Productivity 40cpm Paper size LT to A6 (SEF) Maximum stack on output tray 250 sheets(80 g/m2) Number of stapling positions 1 position Punch Staple capacity (80 g/m2, 30 sheets: 8 ×14SEF, 8 ×...
  • Page 787 Internal Finisher 7.4.3 PAPER FEED Paper transport motor (M16) [A] drives the entrance roller [B] and shift roller [C]. • Paper exit motor (M17) [D] drives the paper exit roller [E]. When the entrance sensor (S45) [F] detects the leading edge of the paper, the exit guide •...
  • Page 788 Internal Finisher The finisher separates each stack by shifting alternately to the left and right. • Shift roller motor (M19) [A] moves the shift roller [B] from side to side. Shift roller HP sensor (S37) [C] detects whether or not the shift roller [B] is at the home •...
  • Page 789 Internal Finisher The exit guide plate motor (M21) [A] drops the gathering roller onto the paper. • The paper exit motor (M17) [B] turns the roller in reverse. When the staple tray paper sensor (S42) [D] detects the paper, the motors stop feeding. •...
  • Page 790 Internal Finisher Stapler [D] is driven by the stapler motor (M23) in stapler. • After stapling, the exit guide plate roller driven by the exit guide plate motor (M21) [A] drops • onto the top of the stack. • The paper exit roller driven by the paper exit motor (M17) [B] feeds out the stack. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 7-38...
  • Page 791 Internal Finisher stopper solenoid (SOL3)[A] moves the actuator [B] until it touches the top of the stack. When the remaining paper sensor (SN40) [A] detects the actuator, the tray lift motor (M22) • [C] lowers the end of the tray nearest the exit. This makes room for more paper on the tray [B].

  • Page 792: Finisher Free Run

    Internal Finisher 7.4.4 FINISHER FREE RUN You can make a finisher free run with the following SPs. No paper is required when executing these SPs. 6-137-001: Free Run 1 (Shift mode) • • 6-137-002: Free Run 2 (Staple mode) 6-137-003: Free Run 3 (Packing mode: Output tray descends to the lowest position.) •...

  • Page 793: Laser Unit

    Laser Unit 7.5 LASER UNIT 7.5.1 OVERVIEW This machine has two LD units. One is for yellow and magenta. Another is for cyan and black. Each LD unit produces laser beams for two colors. Callout Item Callout Item Polygon Motor (M5,M6) Mirror 3 Lens (L1) Lens (L2)

  • Page 794: Laser Synchronizing System

    Laser Unit 7.5.2 LASER SYNCHRONIZING SYSTEM The LD unit has a synchronization detector at the left side of each unit (for the optical paths for the K and M drums only). A laser beam coming from the LD Board [A] travels to the collimating lens [B] polygon motor (M5,M6) [C] lens (L1) [D]...

  • Page 795: Line Scanning Mechanism

    Laser Unit 7.5.3 LINE SCANNING MECHANISM The image read by the scanner is written on the OPC drum [E] with the laser beams. The direction of main scanning is from the front to the rear of the machine. The polygon motor (M5,M6) [A] rotates counterclockwise.

  • Page 796: Image Skew Adjustment

    Laser Unit 7.5.4 IMAGE SKEW ADJUSTMENT In this machine, you can adjust the image skew correction manually. When turning the adjuster [A] clockwise or counterclockwise, the front of the lens moves to the left or right, and this adjusts the image skew. Callout Item Callout...
  • Page 797 Laser Unit 7-45 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 798: Pcdu

    PCDU 7.6 PCDU 7.6.1 OVERVIEW Callout Item Callout Item OPC Drum Cleaning Blade Waste Toner Transport Coil Charge Roller Lubricant Brush Roller Charge Roller Cleaning Roller Lubricant Callout Item Callout Item Doctor Blade Transport Coil (Lower) Transport Coil (Upper) TD sensor (S14) (S15) (S16) (S17) Development Roller Toner Catching Mylar The OPC drum section and the development section are joined by plates at the front and rear of...

  • Page 799: Opc Drum

    PCDU 7.6.2 OPC DRUM Callout Item Callout Item Waste Toner Transport Coil Charge Roller Cleaning Roller Lubricant Brush roller OPC Drum Lubricant Image Transfer Belt (ITB) Drum Cleaning Blade (Counter Image Transfer Roller (1st Transfer Rotation) Roller) Charge Roller A charge roller [E] charges the surface of the OPC drum [G] and drives the charge roller cleaning roller [F].

  • Page 800: Differences Between K And Cmy

    PCDU After a job (not between consecutive jobs), the OPC drum is neutralized using the laser of the Laser Unit. Differences between K and CMY Left: K Right: CMY The following points are the differences between K and CMY. Lubricant [B] quantity K >...
  • Page 801 PCDU Callout Item Callout Item Transport Coil (Upper) Development Roller (Sleeve Architecture) Transport Coil (Lower) OPC Drum TD Sensor (S14-S17) Doctor Blade Callout Item Callout Item Transport Coil (Upper) TD sensor (S14-S17) Transport Coil (Lower) 7-49 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 802: Opc Drum/Development Drive

    PCDU 7.6.4 OPC DRUM/DEVELOPMENT DRIVE The drum motor (M11) [K] drives the drum (K). The development clutch(K) (CL5) [L] drives the Development Unit for K. The drum motor (CMY) (M10) [J] drives the other three drums and the development motor (CMY) (M9) [I] drives the Development Units for C/M/Y.

  • Page 803: Toner Supply Section

    Toner Supply Section 7.7 TONER SUPPLY SECTION 7.7.1 OVERVIEW Callout Item Callout Item ID Chip (K) (PCB3) Transport Coil Toner Bottle Sensor Board (PCB7) Agitator Toner Bottle Toner End Sensor (Y) (S13) Toner Supply Motor (Y) (M4) Shutter 7.7.2 TONER SUPPLY AND TRANSPORT MECHANISM Rotating the toner bottle [B] transports the toner towards the rear of the machine.
  • Page 804 Toner Supply Section Callout Item Callout Item Toner End Sensor (S11-S13) (Only for CMY) Transport Coil Toner Bottle Agitator Toner Supply Motor (M1-M4) D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 7-52...

  • Page 805: Toner Bottle Set Sensor Mechanism

    Toner Supply Section 7.7.3 TONER BOTTLE SET SENSOR MECHANISM Each toner bottle [C] has an ID chip (PCB3-PCB6) [B]. When the toner bottle [C] comes in contact with the toner bottle sensor board (PCB7) [A], the machine detects that the toner bottle is set.

  • Page 806: Estimated Toner Near End

    Toner Supply Section Status Operation panel Detection conditions message Toner End Operation panel Toner End is detected if one of the following SP3-101-001 to pop-up display (alert conditions is met: 004="0" screen): (1) Toner End detection by Toner End sensor <Toner has been (S11-S13).
  • Page 807 Toner Supply Section Toner End is detected if one of the following conditions is met: (1) Toner End detection by Toner End sensor (S11-S13). (2) Toner End detection by Vt output. Toner End detection by Toner End sensor (S11-S13): Toner Near End detection by the Toner End sensor (S11-S13) is done with colors other than black.

  • Page 808: Toner Supply Unit

    Toner Supply Section After this, Toner End detection is performed according to the following flowchart: 7.7.5 TONER SUPPLY UNIT The agitator [C] (in the lower image) transports the toner supplied into the sub-hopper by raising it to the toner transport path [D] (in the lower image). The transport path is level to make the machine’s height lower.

  • Page 809: Id Chip (Pcb3-Pcb6)

    Toner Supply Section [C] Shutter [D] Sub-hopper [A] Toner Bottle Cap [B] Sub-hopper [C] Agitator [D] Toner Transport Path 7.7.6 ID CHIP (PCB3-PCB6) Contact type ID chip (PCB3-PCB6) [B] is correctly mounted by means of the tapered boss for chip positioning [C] and the positioning hole [A]. The information on the toner bottle can be read when the bottle is properly installed.

  • Page 810: Waste Toner Collection

    Waste Toner Collection 7.8 WASTE TONER COLLECTION 7.8.1 WASTE TONER TRANSPORT MECHANISM The waste toner collected from the ITB cleaning unit is transported towards the front of the machine and it goes into the waste toner bottle [A]. The waste toner of yellow and magenta coming from the PCDU (Y/M) and the waste toner from the ITB cleaning unit is collected at the center of the waste toner bottle by the waste toner bottle transport coil [B].

  • Page 811: Waste Toner Collection Mechanism

    Waste Toner Collection 7.8.2 WASTE TONER COLLECTION MECHANISM The waste toner agitator [B] carries waste toner piled up at the front of the waste toner bottle to the rear. The agitator [C] moves together with the waste toner bottle transport coil [D]. When the waste toner full sensor (S36) [A] detects a “waste toner near full”, the machine displays an alert message on the operation panel, which prompts users to replace the waste toner bottle.

  • Page 812: Waste Toner Full Detection

    Waste Toner Collection 7.8.3 WASTE TONER FULL DETECTION When the waste toner moves the rubber actuator [B] to the highest position, the waste toner full sensor (S36) [A] detects that the waste toner bottle is near-full. The machine does not stop at this time.

  • Page 813: Itb/ Paper Transfer

    ITB/ Paper Transfer 7.9 ITB/ PAPER TRANSFER 7.9.1 OVERVIEW Callout Item Callout Item Belt Tension Roller ID Sensor Shutter ITB Cleaning Blade ID Sensor Shutter Solenoid (SOL2) Waste Toner Transport Coil ITB Contact Cam (CMY) Discharge Plate ITB Contact Slider Paper Transfer Roller ITB (Image Transfer Belt) ITB Drive Roller...

  • Page 814: Transfer Bias

    ITB/ Paper Transfer Indirect Image Transfer + Attraction Transfer Method : • There is an attraction method where bias is applied to the paper transfer roller [A]. 7.9.3 TRANSFER BIAS The High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer) (PCB23)[E] applies a transfer bias to the image transfer roller [A].

  • Page 815: Itb Contact

    ITB/ Paper Transfer 7.9.4 ITB CONTACT ITB has a contact mechanism to prevent the CMY drums from early deterioration. The color drums are not needed for B/W printing, so this mechanism releases the ITB from the CMY drums. The ITB lift motor (M14) [B] rotates the ITB contact cam [A] through a gear. The contact slider then moves and raises the image transfer roller [E] into contact with the CMY drums.

  • Page 816: Itb Cleaning

    ITB/ Paper Transfer 7.9.5 ITB CLEANING The cleaning blade [A] cleans the ITB [C]. The waste toner collection coil [B] transports the waste toner removed by the ITB cleaning blade towards the front of the machine. Callout Item Callout Item ITB Cleaning Blade Waste Toner Collection Coil 7.9.6 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION...

  • Page 817: Process Control And Music

    Process Control and MUSIC 7.10 PROCESS CONTROL AND MUSIC 7.10.1 PROCESS CONTROL Outline Process control adjusts the image creation process to maintain a constant image density. Process control is executed at the following times. Trigger Operative Condition Notes Power ON Except when When a certain time passes after the previous job end, •...
  • Page 818 Process Control and MUSIC Trigger Operative Condition Notes SP3-533-001/011 Non-use (Idle) Non-use time becomes more than the value in SP3-531-001. Manual When SP3-011-001 is executed. Process Control Toner End When a Toner End is resolved. Recovery Initial Setting When an initial developer setting is completed. Vc is the charge bias, which is applied to the charge rollers.

  • Page 819: Charge/Development Bias Control And Vtref Compensation

    Process Control and MUSIC Charge/Development Bias Control and Vtref Compensation Charge/Development bias control and Vtref Compensation is done using the following procedure. Its operating time varies depending on the machine’s line speed. 7-67 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 820: This Step Agitates The Developer, And Gets The Td Sensor Output

    Process Control and MUSIC This step adjusts ID sensor’s LED’s light intensity so that Vsg, which is the ID sensor (S27-S29) output when monitoring the bare surface of the ITB, becomes within 4.0±0.5V. When Vsg does not reach the target value three times, the machine issues SC370 (ID sensor Calibration Error).

  • Page 821: Toner Near-End

    Process Control and MUSIC LD Control is set with SP3-600-001 (Process Control/ Select ProCon: LD Control). • If SP 3-600-001 is set to LD Power Control by Process Control (Default): The LD strength is adjusted based on a table which is determined by Development Bias Control and Vtref Correction.
  • Page 822 Process Control and MUSIC checks whether a new toner bottle has been set. The machine then starts the toner supply to recover from the toner end. After supplying toner, the machine checks the toner end sensor (S11-S13) and Vt condition and deactivates the toner end condition. When a new PCDU is set in the machine, the machine automatically detects it and enters the developer initial setting mode.

  • Page 823: Id Sensor (S27-S29)

    Process Control and MUSIC ID sensor (S27-S29) The ID sensor (S27-S29) has 3 sensors laid out on 1 bracket. The ID sensor (center) (S28) [B] acts as an ID sensor and a MUSIC sensor. The ID sensor (front) (S27) [A] and ID sensor (rear) (S29) [C] are used only for MUSIC.

  • Page 824: Music

    Process Control and MUSIC information, the running distance information of Development unit and PCU, and other information used by image density control. 7.10.2 MUSIC Color Skew Adjustment Timing This model has a mechanism that adjusts color skew, which we call MUSIC. The machine creates a pattern for correction, measures the image position by the pattern, and adjusts the image position.

  • Page 825: Music Error Determination

    Process Control and MUSIC MUSIC Error Determination MUSIC determines whether an error occurs for each color. SP2-194-007 shows the results, and SP2-194-010 through -013 show the error details. SP2-194-007 (MUSIC Execution Result - Execution Result) SP2-194-010 (MUSIC Execution Result - Error Result: C) SP2-194-011 (MUSIC Execution Result - Error Result: M) SP2-194-012 (MUSIC Execution Result - Error Result: Y) SP2-194-013 (MUSIC Execution Result - Error Result: K)

  • Page 826: Fusing

    Fusing 7.11 FUSING 7.11.1 OVERVIEW Callout Item Callout Item Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Pressure Roller Fusing Thermistor Pressure Roller Thermistors (TH2-TH4) (Non-contact Sensor) (S10) (Edge: Front, Center, and Edge: Rear) Fusing Thermostat Entrance Guide Plate Separation Plate Fusing Sleeve Belt (QSU Method) Exit Guide Plate Fusing Lamp Pressure Arm...

  • Page 827: Fusing Mechanism

    Fusing 7.11.2 FUSING MECHANISM The fusing unit uses the QSU system. (QSU: Quick Start Up). The heat from the fusing lamp [B] is reflected by the reflector [C] and heats the fusing sleeve belt [D]. The temperature at both ends of the fusing lamp is lower than the middle. The fusing sleeve belt itself has no drive mechanism;...

  • Page 828: Fusing Temperature Control

    Fusing 7.11.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL The fusing temperature is controlled by the fusing thermopile (TH1)[C]. The thermostat [B] is a safety switch. The fusing unit must be replaced if the thermostat opens. Callout Item Callout Item Fusing Lamp Fusing Thermistor (Non-contact Sensor) (S10) Fusing Thermostat Pressure Roller Thermistors (TH2-TH4) (Edge: Front, Center, and Edge: Rear)

  • Page 829: Fusing Drive

    Fusing 7.11.4 FUSING DRIVE The fusing motor (M13) [B] drives the pressure roller [D] through gears. The pressure roller [D] drives the fusing sleeve belt [E]. The fusing entrance sensor (S3) [C] and fusing exit sensor (S8) [A] detect paper jams around/in the fusing unit.

  • Page 830: Fusing Mode Control

    Fusing 7.11.5 FUSING MODE CONTROL When the main power switch (SW1) is turned ON, the machine starts the fusing warm-up. The machine drives the fusing motor (M13) to increase the fusing temperature to the reload target temperature. When the machine completes the fusing warm-up, it keeps the reload target temperature by driving the fusing motor (M13) for a certain period of time.

  • Page 831: Cpm Down Control

    Fusing 7.11.6 CPM DOWN CONTROL This machine automatically lowers the CPM according to usage and machine status to obtain the best image quality and keep the machine in good condition. If the fusing lamp is always activated during consecutive printing, and/or the paper size is smaller than the lamp’s width, then some heat will not be used for fusing and may stay around the front and rear ends of the fusing unit.

  • Page 832: Paper Feed And Registration (Im C300 Series)

    Paper Feed and Registration (IM C300 Series) 7.12 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION (IM C300 SERIES) 7.12.1 OVERVIEW Callout Item Callout Item End Fence Registration Sensor (S32) Paper Feed Tray Paper Feed Sensor (S31) Side Fence Bypass Feed Roller Tray Paper End Sensor (Main Unit) (S30)

  • Page 833: Paper Transport Motor (M12)

    Paper Feed and Registration (IM C300 Series) 7.12.2 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR (M12) The drive from the paper transport motor (M12) [E] is transmitted to each clutch through gears. The paper transport motor (M12) [E] controls paper feed/exit, duplex, registration, waste toner transport coil and bypass tray lift.

  • Page 834: Tray Lift Mechanism

    Paper Feed and Registration (IM C300 Series) 7.12.3 TRAY LIFT MECHANISM The tray lift motor (M15) [D] rotates the gear [C] and the gear makes the rack [F] move. The movement of the rack pulls the spring and this moves the bottom plate lift arm [B].

  • Page 835: Transport Control

    Paper Feed and Registration (IM C300 Series) 7.12.4 TRANSPORT CONTROL The paper feed sensor (S31) [B] monitors whether the paper is fed by the paper feed roller [A] at intervals that are too short. If an overly short interval is detected, the paper feed clutch (CL9) is stopped momentarily to increase the interval and prevent a paper jam due to such a short interval.

  • Page 836: Paper Feed And Registration (Im C400 Series)

    Paper Feed and Registration (IM C400 Series) 7.13 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION (IM C400 SERIES) 7.13.1 OVERVIEW Callout Item Pick-up Roller Paper Feed Roller Registration Roller Vertical Transport Roller Friction Roller Callout Item Callout Item Pick-up Arm Paper Feed Roller Tray Lift Sensor (S35) Friction Roller Pick-up Roller...

  • Page 837: Paper Transport

    Paper Feed and Registration (IM C400 Series) 7.13.2 PAPER TRANSPORT The drive from the paper transport motor (M12) is transmitted to each clutch through gears. The paper transport motor (M12) controls paper feed, duplex, registration, waste toner transport coil and bypass tray lift. Callout Item Callout...

  • Page 838: Paper Feed Mechanism

    Paper Feed and Registration (IM C400 Series) 7.13.3 PAPER FEED MECHANISM When the paper feed tray is set in the machine, a pressure release lever [A] is pressed, the friction roller [B] comes in contact with the paper feed roller, and the pick-up roller [C] contacts the top of the paper (to prevent paper remaining, when the paper feed tray is withdrawn, the pressure release lever returns and contact with the rollers is released).
  • Page 839 Paper Feed and Registration (IM C400 Series) not been transported to the paper feed sensor position), the paper feed clutch (CL9) [D] does not switch OFF, and pre-feed is performed. Pre-feed is as follows: 1.The second sheet is transported to the paper feed sensor (S31) [A] position. 2.When the leading edge of the second sheet reaches the paper feed sensor (S31) [A], the paper feed clutch (CL9) [D] switches OFF.

  • Page 840: Paper End Detection

    Paper Feed and Registration (IM C400 Series) 7.13.4 PAPER END DETECTION When there is no more paper in the paper feed tray, the leading edge of the paper end feeler [2] falls into a notch [3] in the base plate, and the tray paper end sensor (main unit) (S30) [1] at the rear edge of the paper end feeler switches ON.

  • Page 841: Tray Lift Mechanism

    Paper Feed and Registration (IM C400 Series) 7.13.5 TRAY LIFT MECHANISM When the paper feed tray is set in the machine, the set sensor (S34) at the rear of the tray switches ON, and it is detected that the tray is set. The coupling [B] between the shaft [C] at the rear of the tray and the tray lift motor (M15) [A] then engages, the motor rotates, and the tray base plate [D] is lifted.

  • Page 842: Tray Auto-Close Mechanism

    Paper Feed and Registration (IM C400 Series) 7.13.6 TRAY AUTO-CLOSE MECHANISM Part name Part name Paper Feed Tray One-way Clutch Draw-in pin Draw-in lever Oil Damper Tray draw-in unit To enhance operability, a tray draw-in mechanism is used. The tray is drawn in by a one-way clutch in the draw-in unit. To draw the tray out, an oil damper is released.

  • Page 843: Paper Feed And Registration (New Functions)

    Paper Feed and Registration (New Functions) 7.14 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION (NEW FUNCTIONS) The actual paper length is measured by the registration sensor (S32) and compared with the paper length configured in the machine's Paper Tray Settings. If there is a difference of 30 mm or more, an internal flag is set to indicate a paper length error.
  • Page 844 Paper Feed and Registration (New Functions) Item SP No. Tray 1 SP1-909-002 (ImageRetry: Function:Tray1) Bypass Tray SP1-909-003 (ImageRetry: Function:MF) Tray 2 SP1-909-004 (ImageRetry: Function:Tray2) Tray 3 SP1-909-005 (ImageRetry: Function:Tray3) Tray 4 SP1-909-006 (ImageRetry: Function:Tray4) Resending the image increases toner consumption, so if the need to form the image again increases, you can select between 2 actions.

  • Page 845: Bypass Tray

    Bypass Tray 7.15 BYPASS TRAY 7.15.1 BYPASS TRAY BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MECHANISM The paper transport motor (M12) rotates the bypass tray lift clutch (CL1) [F], and this moves the bypass tray bottom plate [A] up and down. The position of the bypass tray bottom plate lift cams (and because of this, the bypass tray bottom plate) is detected by the bypass tray lift sensor (S4) [C].

  • Page 846: Paper Size Detection And Paper End Detection

    Bypass Tray 7.15.2 PAPER SIZE DETECTION AND PAPER END DETECTION The bypass paper width sensor (S5) [A] is not at the side of the tray but at the side of the bypass paper feed unit. Callout Item Callout Item Bypass Paper Width Sensor (S5) Paper End Sensor (Bypass) (S6) Bypass Feed Roller Bypass Feed Friction Pad...
  • Page 847 Bypass Tray If size mismatch is detected, it is regarded as a paper jam. Printing stops and an alert • message appears on the operation panel. When printing a single-page job, the job is delivered (and included in the billing), and then •...

  • Page 848: Duplex

    Duplex 7.16 DUPLEX 7.16.1 OVERVIEW IM C300 series D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 7-96...
  • Page 849 Duplex IM C400F 7-97 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 850 Duplex IM C400SRF Callout Item Callout Item Duplex Entrance Sensor (S1) Duplex Exit Sensor (S2) Duplex Paper Transport Roller Duplex Paper Transport Roller (Upper) (Middle)*1 Duplex Paper Transport Roller (Lower) *1 IM C400SRF only The IM C400SRF has a longer paper transfer path for duplex printing than other •...

  • Page 851: Duplex Mechanism

    Duplex 7.16.2 DUPLEX MECHANISM The drive from the paper transport motor (M12) [D] is transmitted to the duplex clutch (CL6) [C] through a gear, and the duplex clutch (CL6) turns on to drive the duplex paper transport rollers. Drive is transmitted to the Duplex Paper Transport Roller in the order of lower, middle upper rollers through the timing belt.
  • Page 852 Duplex IM C400SRF Callout Item Duplex Entrance Sensor (S1) Duplex Exit Sensor (S2) Duplex Clutch (CL6) Paper Transport Motor (M12) D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 7-100...

  • Page 853: Interleaving

    Duplex 7.16.3 INTERLEAVING • The following descriptions are accompanied by illustrations of the IM C300 series, but the IM C400 series has the same mechanism. This machine adopts “2 in 1” interleaving. The interleave operation of this machine is as follows: 1st sheet back ->...
  • Page 854 Duplex D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 7-102...

  • Page 855: Paper Exit And Inverter

    Paper Exit and Inverter 7.17 PAPER EXIT AND INVERTER 7.17.1 OVERVIEW 7-103 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 856 Paper Exit and Inverter Callout Item Callout Item Fusing Exit Sensor (S8) Exit Junction Gate Paper Exit Sensor (S7) Paper Exit Transport Roller Paper Exit/reverse Roller D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 7-104...

  • Page 857: Paper Exit Operation

    Paper Exit and Inverter 7.17.2 PAPER EXIT OPERATION The paper transport motor (M12) rotates the paper exit/reverse roller [A] through a gear. The paper exit sensor (S7) [C] detects paper exit jams and the paper inversion timing. 7-105 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 858 Paper Exit and Inverter Callout Item Callout Item Paper Exit/reverse Roller Paper Exit Sensor (S7) Exit Junction Gate Paper Exit Transport Roller The paper exit transport roller [E] is provided on the IM C400SRF because the transport path from fusing to paper exit is longer than on other models. The paper exit transport roller conveys the drive from the paper transport motor (M12) [F] via a timing belt.

  • Page 859: Inverter Operation

    Paper Exit and Inverter 7.17.3 INVERTER OPERATION Callout Item Callout Item Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1) Reverse Clutch (CL2) Paper Exit Clutch (CL3) The junction gate solenoid (SOL1) [A], paper exit clutch (CL3)[B], and reverse clutch (CL2)[C] control the exit junction gate and paper exit/reverse roller simultaneously. The paper exit clutch (CL3) and reverse clutch (CL2) transmit the driving to the paper exit inverter roller, in opposite directions respectively.
  • Page 860 Paper Exit and Inverter In duplex printing, after the first side of a sheet has been printed, the exit junction gate solenoid (SOL1) turns ON, and the exit junction gate has been switched to direct the paper to the inverter path.

  • Page 861: Electrical Parts

    Electrical Parts 7.18 ELECTRICAL PARTS 7.18.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM 7-109 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 862: Board Outline

    Electrical Parts 7.18.2 BOARD OUTLINE Controls all the systems related to the main machine. Contains an x86 CPU, controller ASIC, IO control ASIC, and RAM. Scanning control circuit which performs analog signal processing and AD image conversion of the CCD read image. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 7-110...
  • Page 863 Electrical Parts It also has an interface with the BiCU (PCB1), and controls scanner input and output signals according to CPU commands. LD control circuit which drives the laser diode with a universal driver. Controls the engine, as well as the sensors, motors and solenoids of main machine. Controls the fax program.

  • Page 864: Machine Ventilation

    Machine Ventilation 7.19 MACHINE VENTILATION 7.19.1 OVERVIEW IM C300 series / IM C400F D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 7-112...
  • Page 865 Machine Ventilation IM C400SRF Callout Item Callout Item LD Unit Cooling Fan (FAN2) PCDU Cooling Fan (FAN3) Fusing Unit Cooling Fan (FAN1) PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4) Ozone Filter Paper Exit Exhaust Fan (FAN5) Temperature/Humidity Sensor (S18) *1 IM C400SRF only The machine has four fans [A] [B] [E] [F] to ventilate the interior of the machine.

  • Page 866: Machine Ventilation

    Machine Ventilation On the IM C400SRF, the transport path from fusing to paper exit is longer than on other models, resulting in the roller being susceptible to condensation due to the influence of outside air. Therefore, the IM C400SRF is provided with a paper exit exhaust fan (FAN5) to prevent condensation on the paper exit roller [B] and the paper exit reverse roller driven roller [A].
  • Page 867 Machine Ventilation Status PCDU Cooling Fan Fusing Unit LD Unit Cooling Paper Exit (FAN3) Cooling Fan Exhaust Fan (FAN2) Exhaust (FAN1) Fan (FAN5) (FAN4) C400SRF only) Lower Stops * Rotates at Stops * Stops * Rotates at Power low-speed* low-speed* Silent Stops * Abnormal...

  • Page 868: Energy Save

    Energy Save 7.20 ENERGY SAVE 7.20.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment. The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are at the default settings.
  • Page 869 If [On (Energy Saving)] is selected, it takes longer than usual to be ready to use the machine. Recovery Time/Reduced Electrical Consumption Model Name Reduced electrical consumption in Sleep Recovery time from Sleep mode mode IM C300 0.65 W 7.7 sec. IM C300F 0.65 W 7.7 sec. IM C400F 0.65 W...

  • Page 870: Power States Of This Machine

    Energy Save Model Name Reduced electrical consumption in Sleep Recovery time from Sleep mode mode IM C300F 0.65 W 8.1 sec. IM C400F 0.65 W 8.0 sec. 0.65 W 8.3 sec. C400SRF *1 The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical consumption may differ depending on the conditions and environment of the machine.
  • Page 871 Energy Save State Description 1 Standby/Printing State where normal operation is possible after warm-up • State during printing • 2 Printing State when printing with the backlight of the operation panel turned OFF state/Panel OFF 3 Fusing OFF State where the Standby Fusing OFF state is entered when the time set with the "Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off"...
  • Page 872 Energy Save Device state for each Energy Saving state State Energy Saving Operation Engine (Printer) panel Standby/Printing Printing state/Panel fusing OFF (Printer is in Quiet state) Quiet state ON*1 (Printer is in Quiet state) Engine OFF Blinking Sleep gradually OFF or ON*1 ON*1 ON*1 STR state...

  • Page 873: Verification Of Up Time For Each Energy Saving State

    Energy Save 7.20.3 VERIFICATION OF UP TIME FOR EACH ENERGY SAVING STATE The up time for each power state of the machine can be checked with SP8-961 (Electricity Status). It is also output on the SMC sheet. Name Description SP8-961-001 Ctrl Standby Time Cumulative time of Engine OFF mode, Quiet mode, and Standby mode SP8-961-002 STR Time...

  • Page 874: Checking The Up Time By Device State

    Energy Save 7.20.4 CHECKING THE UP TIME BY DEVICE STATE SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each mode. SP8-941-001 Operation Cumulative time of the state in which the engine state Time notification is enabled.

  • Page 875: Recommendation

    Energy Save 7.20.5 RECOMMENDATION We recommend that the default settings related to energy saving should be kept. • If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their energy costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy use.

  • Page 876: New Functions

    New Functions 7.21 NEW FUNCTIONS 7.21.1 PS3/PDF DIRECT EMULATION (CLONE PS) Overview This machine is equipped with a clone program for emulating Adobe PostScript/PDF (hereafter “Clone PS”) as a standard feature. So, by default, it can perform printing using PostScript 3 and PDF Direct Print, in addition to RPCS.

  • Page 877: How To Distinguish Adobe Ps From Clone Ps

    New Functions How to Distinguish Adobe PS from Clone PS In the operation panel screen, it is difficult to tell whether Adobe PS or Clone PS is in use. Both “PS3” and “PDF” are shown on the screen, regardless of whether Adobe PS or Clone PS is used.
  • Page 878 New Functions Operation Panel: Firmware Version • Settings > System Settings > Machine/Control Panel Information > Firmware Version When PostScript3 Unit Type M41 (Adobe PS) is installed: D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 7-126...
  • Page 879 New Functions When Clone PS only: Module Description Name PS3 / The Clone PS firmware number appears. IRIPS PS3 The Clone PS firmware number starts with “D0C9”. The Adobe PS firmware number starts with "D0CJ" appears. This module name appears in the firmware list only if PostScript3 Unit Type M41 is installed.

  • Page 880: Difference In Device Fonts

    New Functions Font Change Confirmation screen • The “Font Change Confirmation” screen is accessible only when Clone PS is used. On the Home screen, select the Settings icon > Printer Settings > PS Menu > Font Change Confirmation. Difference in Device Fonts The variety and number of built-in fonts (device fonts) differ between Adobe PS and Clone PS.
  • Page 881 New Functions Example 2 LetterGothic type Adobe Clone When LetterGothic is originally used, Clone PS substitutes it with LetterGothic-Regular. In this case, the character spacing differs from that in the original data. Example 3 PS type Chicago Adobe Clone Clone PS does not support alternative fonts for Chicago; instead, the Courier font (*) is used.

  • Page 882: List Of Fonts And Their Replacements (Adobe Ps -> Clone Ps)

    New Functions If the customer often prints data containing Adobe fonts that are almost the same in terms of spacing and shape as their substitutes, the confirmation screen appears every time printing is performed, making the printing operation cumbersome. In such a case, the font change confirmation screen can be hidden.
  • Page 883 New Functions Arial-BoldItalicMT NimbusSansNo2-BoldItalic AvantGarde-Book URWGothic-Book AvantGarde-BookOblique URWGothic-BookOblique AvantGarde-Demi URWGothic-Demi AvantGarde-DemiOblique URWGothic-DemiOblique Bodoni NimbusMonoPS-Regular Bodoni-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular Bodoni-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular Bodoni-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular Bodoni-Poster NimbusMonoPS-Regular Bodoni-PosterCompressed NimbusMonoPS-Regular Bookman-Light URWBookman-Light Bookman-LightItalic URWBookman-LightItalic Bookman-Demi URWBookman-Demi Bookman-DemiItalic URWBookman-DemiItalic Carta NimbusMonoPS-Regular Chicago NimbusMonoPS-Regular Clarendon NimbusMonoPS-Regular Clarendon-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular Clarendon-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular CooperBlack...
  • Page 884 New Functions GillSans-ExtraBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular Goudy NimbusMonoPS-Regular Goudy-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular Goudy-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular Goudy-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular Goudy-ExtraBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular Helvetica-Condensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular Helvetica-Condensed-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl NimbusMonoPS-Regular Helvetica-Narrow NimbusSansNarrow-Regular Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique NimbusSansNarrow-Oblique Helvetica-Narrow-Bold NimbusSansNarrow-Bold Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique NimbusSansNarrow-BoldOblique HoeflerText-Regular NimbusMonoPS-Regular HoeflerText-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular HoeflerText-Black NimbusMonoPS-Regular HoeflerText-BlackItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular HoeflerText-Ornaments NimbusMonoPS-Regular JoannaMT NimbusMonoPS-Regular JoannaMT-Italic...
  • Page 885 New Functions NewYork NimbusMonoPS-Regular Optima NimbusMonoPS-Regular Optima-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular Optima-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular Optima-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular Oxford NimbusMonoPS-Regular Palatino-Roman Palladio-Roman Palatino-Italic Palladio-Italic Palatino-Bold Palladio-Bold Palatino-BoldItalic Palladio-BoldItalic StempelGaramond-Roman NimbusMonoPS-Regular StempelGaramond-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular StempelGaramond-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular StempelGaramond-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular Tekton NimbusMonoPS-Regular TimesNewRomanPSMT NimbusRomanNo9-Regular TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT NimbusRomanNo9-Italic TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT NimbusRomanNo9-Bold TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalicMT NimbusRomanNo9-BoldItalic Univers NimbusMonoPS-Regular Univers-Oblique...

  • Page 886: Differences In Driver Functions

    New Functions Differences in Driver Functions As shown below, there are differences in available driver functions between Adobe PS and Clone PS. Font Substitution Table (Applicable only to the driver for Windows OS) Start > Device and Printer > Printer Properties > Device Settings For Clone PS, the Font Substitution Table under the Device Settings menu will not be displayed.

  • Page 887: Other New Features

    New Functions * “Text Priority” is selected for text, and “Photo” for graphics and images. In the driver menu for Mac OS X, the “User Setting” option is shown at half brightness and cannot be selected. 7.21.2 OTHER NEW FEATURES •...

  • Page 889: Smart Operation Panel

    SMART OPERATION PANEL...

  • Page 891: Replacement And Adjustment

    Replacement and Adjustment 8. SMART OPERATION PANEL 8.1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 8.1.1 MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD Remove the operation panel unit. (Operation Panel) Remove the bottom cover [A] ( ×4). There are ten hooks inside the operation panel unit. Before removing the •...
  • Page 892 Replacement and Adjustment Remove the main controller board [A]. Lift the fastener of the LCD I/F cable [A] on the main controller board side. • By factory default, the following switches of the DIP switch [A] on the main controller board are set to ON: No.1, No.3, and No.6.
  • Page 893 Replacement and Adjustment ON: No.1, No.3, and No.6 (this is the factory default setting of a service part). • If the DIP switch setting is wrong, SC672 will be displayed. • DIP switch No.1 turns ON/OFF the SC reduction function. Change the setting when needed.

  • Page 894: Wi-Fi Module (Pcb21)

    Replacement and Adjustment 8.1.2 WI-FI MODULE (PCB21) Remove the operation panel unit. (Operation Panel) Remove the base bracket (Main Controller Board). Remove the Wi-Fi module (PCB21) [A]. After replacing the Wi-Fi module (PCB21), perform the following checks: • • Wireless LAN Check (Wireless LAN Check) Bluetooth Check...

  • Page 895: Lcd

    Replacement and Adjustment 8.1.3 LCD Remove the operation panel unit. (Operation Panel) Remove the main controller board (Main Controller Board). Remove the connector of the LCD I/F cable [A]. Lift the fastener of the LCD I/F cable [A]. Remove the bracket [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...
  • Page 896 Replacement and Adjustment Remove the LCD unit [A]. Remove the LCD [A]. • After replacing the LCD, perform the following checks. LCD Check (LCD • Check) TouchPanel Check (TouchPanel Check) • Perform "TouchPanel Calibration" (TouchPanel Calibration) and "MultiTouch • Calibration" (MultiTouch Calibration) of the Self Check function.

  • Page 897: Speaker

    Replacement and Adjustment 8.1.4 SPEAKER Remove the operation panel unit. (Operation Panel) Remove the bottom cover (Main Controller Board). Remove the speaker [A] together with the speaker holder. Remove the speaker [A] from the speaker holder [B]. After replacing the speaker, perform the following check. •...

  • Page 898: Microphone

    Replacement and Adjustment 8.1.5 MICROPHONE Remove the operation panel unit. (Operation Panel) Remove the main controller board (Main Controller Board). Remove the LCD unit (LCD). Remove the microphone [A]. 8.1.6 NFC BOARD Remove the operation panel unit. (Operation Panel) Remove the hinge cover [A]. Remove the cover of the NFC board [A].
  • Page 899 Replacement and Adjustment Remove the NFC board [A]. A protective sheet [B] is attach to the surface of the NFC board [A]. D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 900: Mechanism

    Mechanism 8.2 MECHANISM 8.2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS Hardware Specifications Name Name Speaker Microphone Main power indicator Extended Feature key (EX3) USB slot for digital cameras Extended Feature key (EX2) USB slot for NFC card readers Extended Feature key (EX1) NFC tag Control panel reboot key [Check Status] indicator SD card slot...
  • Page 901 Mechanism Category Specification ARM Cortex-A9 Quad Core 1GHz (SoC: MCIMX6Q5EYM10AD) Touch panel Low load touch panel (recognizes touches to two points) Memory Volatile Memory • RAM (DDR3L-1066), 2GB • Non-Volatile Memory eMMC NAND, 8GB Uses a 16GB product in SLC Mode. •...
  • Page 902 Mechanism Category Specification Data In indicator (blue) • Flashes when the machine receives data from a printer driver or LAN-Fax driver. Fax indicator (blue) • Flashes while sending or receiving a fax. Lights when there is a received fax document in the fax memory. Media access lamp (blue) •...

  • Page 903: Software Specifications

    Mechanism Item This model Previous model 802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz only) (for North America/EU/Korea) Bluetooth Bluetooth4.2 Bluetooth4.0 NFC tag Built in Not equipped Power consumption in 0.18 W or less 0.35 W or less Sleep mode Japanese, English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Norwegian, Danish, Swedish, Polish, Portuguese, Hungarian, Czech, Finnish, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Thai, Russian, Arabic, Greek, Korean, Catalan, Turkish, Brazilian Portuguese Note: Available languages may vary depending on the machine’s specifications.

  • Page 904: On The Smart Operation Panel, Applications Can Be Installed In Addition To The Pre-Installed Applications

    Mechanism The Android Firmware (Android OS) consists of the following modules that are called “stacks”. Linux kernel • Android Runtime • • Library Application Framework • On the Smart Operation Panel, applications such as the GW applications (Copy/Printer/Document Server/Scanner/Fax), Control Panel Browser, the standard keyboard, Installer, Gallery, Self Check are pre-installed.
  • Page 905 Mechanism Communication Details module/signal name OCS Library OSC stands for Operating Control Service. It is a module that controls the control panel. The set of signals used by this module to control the control panel are called the OCS Library. It is used during communication between the Legacy UI (system) module on the Smart Operation Panel and the GW module for the following processes.
  • Page 906 Mechanism Communication Details module/signal name applications. It communicates with the GW controller via the CATS module. CATS CATS stands for Cheetah Application Total System. It is a module in the GW controller. Because the Smart Operation Panel uses the Android OS, the contents and protocols of communication are not the same as those of the conventional control panel.

  • Page 907: Panel Components/Screen Layout

    USB slot for NFC You can connect the authentication card reader/writer and devices card readers supporting near-field communication (NFC). NFC tag Used to connect the machine and a smart device with the RICOH simple input and output. [Check Status] Indicates system status. indicator...

  • Page 908: Panel Display

    Mechanism Name Description Extended Feature Used for system maintenance, such as control panel self-check. key (EX2) Extended Feature Used for system maintenance, such as control panel self-check. key (EX1) Control panel reboot Used when rebooting the control panel. SD card slot Insert an SD card here.
  • Page 909 Mechanism Name Description errors occurring when the machine is connected to the Internet. Specify [Cookie] in the control panel browser to [ON] to display Help properly. [Energy Enters Sleep mode. Saver] key [Switch Press to scroll the screens right and left. The Home screen has 5 Screens] key screens.You can switch between the screens by flicking.

  • Page 910: Login User Information And Login/Logout Key Also Appear

    Mechanism Login user information and login/logout key also appear. Name Description [User icon] key You can configure the authentication setting. This key appears when someone is logging in. If pressed after logging in, the login user name appears for a while in the login user information display area. [Login/Logout] key This key is displayed if the authentication function is enabled.

  • Page 911: Electrical Components

    Mechanism 8.2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Operation Panel Unit Touch Panel The touch panel of this machine uses a 4-wire resistive film method (low load resistive film analog 4-wire method). It can detect two points for flick/drag/pinch-in/pinch-out operations. Resistive touch panel has been adopted in order to allow operation with a prosthetic hand. An analog 4-wire resistive film touch panel has 2 layers.
  • Page 912 Mechanism [A]: Spacing dot [B]: PET film [C]: Transparent conductive film [D]: Base glass [E]: LCD panel With the Multi-touch calibration in the self-check function, the touch panel is automatically calibrated using the results of touches to the top left and bottom right positions.

  • Page 913: Controlling The Power Supply

    Mechanism 8.2.4 CONTROLLING THE POWER SUPPLY Exiting Energy Saving Modes Because this model of Smart Operation Panel has no hardware keys, the MFP exits from energy saving mode when the user does one of the following: • Touches the display panel Lifts the ADF •...

  • Page 914: In Normal Mode

    Mechanism • In the following cases, the control panel starts up in Normal mode even if [Quick] is selected. The power cord has been disconnected from the power outlet after the last • shutdown. The MFP is turned ON after being turned OFF due to reasons such as a power •...

  • Page 915: Shutdown Functions

    Mechanism Shutdown Functions The shutdown functions and their uses are as follows. Shutdown Operation mode Normal Same as shutdown by users. Turn the main power switch (SW1) Shutdown OFF. Forced When normal shutdown does not Hold the main power switch shutdown complete even though you waited a long (SW1) 6 seconds or longer.
  • Page 916 Mechanism This MFP has two additional shutdown functions to facilitate maintenance. Shutting down the MFP for parts replacement (Starting up in Normal mode when Quick mode is selected) When Quick mode is selected, the MFP prepares for the next startup when it shuts down. This causes the shutdown process to take longer than when Normal mode is selected.

  • Page 917: System Maintenance

    System Maintenance 8.3 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 8.3.1 MAINTENANCE MODES Service program (SP) modes for the Smart Operation Panel are as follows: Mode Notes SP Mode (MFP) SP modes for the MFP The numeric keys are required to enter this (controller, engine) mode.

  • Page 918: Login Status Indicator

    System Maintenance • To exit the soft keys, press [EXIT] on the screen. Login Status Indicator When you log in to the control panel’s service mode, the Screen Features Settings screen is displayed. • “Service” is displayed in the login information area [A]. [Logout] is displayed in the Login key area [B] to allow logout from the service mode.

  • Page 919: When Entry To Service Mode Is Prohibited By The Administrator

    System Maintenance Authentication settings Administrator authentication: OFF Administrator authentication: ON Administrator User authentication: OFF User authentication: OFF authentication: ON User authentication: ON Screen of the function selected in Screen of the function selected in [Home] screen [Function Priority] [Function Priority] When Entry to Service Mode Is Prohibited by the Administrator The administrator of the MFP can prohibit entry into the control panel’s service mode by enabling [Settings] >...

  • Page 920: Wireless & Networks

    System Maintenance Wireless & Networks Menu level Description 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Wireless Group Owner Mode You can only view the setting. Direct Settings Connection Password You can only view the setting. DHCP Server IP Address You can only view the setting. DHCP IP Address Range You can only view the setting.

  • Page 921: Device

    System Maintenance Device Menu level Description 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Storage & Internal Used and Total Displays the used size and total size of the storage Storage Capacity internal storage. SD CARD Used and Total SD Displays the used size and total size of the SD Card Capacity card.

  • Page 922: Personal

    System Maintenance Personal Menu level Description 1st level 2nd level level Language & Registration You can register the external keyboard, display the input Keyboard connected keyboard, or remove the external keyboard. System Menu level Description 1st level 2nd level 3rd level 4th level Screen Status...
  • Page 923 5: Version 4.41 • • 7: Version 5.00 8: Version 5.10 • 4th digit: PCB vendor • N: NEC R: RICOH • Screen Use of External Screen SD Card Specify the SD card slot Device Interface slot availability on the Smart Settings Operation Panel.
  • Page 924 System Maintenance Menu level Description 1st level 2nd level 3rd level 4th level [Network/Interface] > [Control Panel: Wireless LAN]. If you select [Do not prohibit] for this setting, the Wi-Fi function setting in [Control Panel: Wireless LAN] is displayed. The setting remains unchanged.
  • Page 925 System Maintenance Menu level Description 1st level 2nd level 3rd level 4th level prohibit] for this setting, the Bluetooth function setting in [Bluetooth] is displayed. The setting remains unchanged. Screen If you select [Prohibit] for SD Card this setting, the Screen SD Slot Card Slot function is (Do not...
  • Page 926 System Maintenance Menu level Description 1st level 2nd level 3rd level 4th level HTTPS connections. (Normally, input a number within 55101-55111.) Home Key Settings Home Key You can change the Settings transition destination except for the Home screen when pushing the [Home] icon. Home Key Normal mode: Assignment...
  • Page 927 System Maintenance Menu level Description 1st level 2nd level 3rd level 4th level Assignment Mode]. You cannot set other than the above because of high brightness. Application Displays a list of installed Settings applications. If you press [SETTINGS] for an application, the setting screen for the CE is displayed.
  • Page 928 System Maintenance Menu level Description 1st level 2nd level 3rd level 4th level Settings or disable backups and restore backup data. Screen device This setting prevents the always-connection operation panel from Setting entering Sleep mode, so that Bluetooth and other communication devices remain connected.

  • Page 929: Panel Self Check

    System Maintenance 8.3.4 PANEL SELF CHECK The following are available as self-diagnostics functions of the control panel: • LED Check • Key Check LCD Check • TouchPanel Calibration • • Bluetooth Check • Speaker Check TouchPanel Check • Wireless LAN Check •...

  • Page 930: Led Check

    System Maintenance LED Check Select the [All Light On] check box, and make sure the following LEDs light: Data In indicator (facsimile and printer modes) • • Fax indicator [Check Status] indicator (flashes in red and orange alternately) • Operation call light (if attached) (lights in red/blue) •...

  • Page 931: Lcd Check

    System Maintenance LCD Check Visually inspect the color of the LCD. The displayed colors are white/black/red/green/blue. The LCD changes to the next color when you press it. The check is completed when all colors have been displayed. The screen returns to the top menu of [Self Check].

  • Page 932: Bluetooth Check

    System Maintenance Bluetooth Check Check and configure the Bluetooth device connection. When the check is completed, press [Back] to return to the top menu of [Self Check]. You cannot switch Bluetooth to [ON] or [OFF] from the [Self Check] menu. Before •...

  • Page 933: Speaker Check

    System Maintenance Speaker Check Tests the speaker by playing the reference sound. Select the frequency (220Hz, 440Hz, 880Hz, 1760Hz, or 2000Hz). Press [START/STOP] to play the sound. Touch the volume bar, and play the sound at minimum and maximum volumes. Press [START/STOP] to stop the sound.

  • Page 934: Wireless Lan Check

    System Maintenance If you press the [OK] button, the inspection implementation status switches to “Adjusted” and the screen returns to the self-inspection menu. If you press the [Back] key, the inspection implementation status does not switch and the screen returns to the self-inspection menu. Wireless LAN Check Checks the condition of the wireless LAN connection.

  • Page 935: Multitouch Calibration

    System Maintenance When the check is completed, press [Back] to return to the top menu of [Self Check]. MultiTouch Calibration Calibrate the touch panel for multi-tap input methods such as pinch-in/pinch-out. Touch the center of both “+” signs. The two “+” signs are displayed in the order of top left and bottom right.

  • Page 936: Multitouch Sensitivity Adjustment

    System Maintenance MultiTouch Sensitivity Adjustment Adjusts the MultiTouch sensitivity of the operation panel. Check the influence of external noise. If the detection level is 3 or higher, adjustment is necessary. The sensitivity level can be adjusted between "0" and "10". The default setting is "10". If set to "0", the MultiTouch function is turned off.
  • Page 937 System Maintenance Keep your finger on the cross at the top right. Check the result. If the detection level is "3" or "4", adjust the MultiTouch sensitivity. Use [V] or [^] to adjust the sensitivity level. 8-47 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 938: Recovery Mode

    System Maintenance 8.3.5 RECOVERY MODE The recovery mode menu is as follows. Ask your manager for details on how to enter Recovery mode. Menu Description reboot system Reboots the Android OS. apply update from Updates the Cheetah System firmware by specifying the folder path. sdcard wipe data/factory Deletes all installed applications and all settings on the Cheetah.

  • Page 939: Backup/Restore For Smart Operation Panel

    System Maintenance Function Operation for Smart Operation Panel Resets a single application. Resetting User Code Hold down [Reset] for 2 seconds. Authentication Returns to the User Code entry screen. 8.3.7 BACKUP/RESTORE FOR SMART OPERATION PANEL APPLICATION/SETTINGS FUNCTION Overview Application settings and additional applications installed on the Smart Operation Panel can be backed up automatically and can be restored, e.g.

  • Page 940: Restore

    System Maintenance The amount of time for the backup is as follows: • Example: Data Backup time Additional applications 106MB 1m 6s Application settings 0.2MB Total 106.2MB 1m 42s The default setting is “Enabled”. To change it to “Disabled”, uncheck “Enabled”.

  • Page 941: Software Update

    System Maintenance 8.3.8 SOFTWARE UPDATE Updating the Smart Operation Panel In the case of models provided with package firmware only, updates for the Smart • Operation Panel and applications are also provided via package firmware. For details, "Firmware Update (Removable Media)".

  • Page 942: Installation/Update From A Media

    System Maintenance Update method Features Control Applications panel firmware Site. When administrator authentication is enabled, an administrator privilege is required to start Application Site. If you log in to the operation panel service mode, however, you can use it with CE privilege. *1 Update can only be done by using a package file.

  • Page 943: Installation/Update From The Edc Server

    System Maintenance If the control panel firmware has to be updated, the control panel starts in the recovery mode and the firmware is automatically updated. The control panel restarts when updating is completed. The result notification is processed after the control panel restarts. Refer to ”Firmware Update (Removable Media)”...

  • Page 944: Log In To The Control Panel's Service Mode

    Select [Install from Server]. Enter the product key and press [Execute]. Follow the instructions shown on the screen. An application cannot be installed unless it is digitally signed by Ricoh. • Log in to the control panel’s service mode. Select [Apps] > [Install].

  • Page 945: If You Try To Uninstall An Activated Application Without First Deactivating It, The Uninstallation Will Fail. However, The Application Can Be Uninstalled Without Deactivation (Forced Uninstallation) In The Following Circumstances

    System Maintenance Follow the instructions shown on the screen. If you try to uninstall an activated application without first deactivating it, the uninstallation will fail. However, the application can be uninstalled without deactivation (forced uninstallation) in the following circumstances: Uninstallation using the service login uninstallation menu •...

  • Page 946: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting 8.4 TROUBLESHOOTING 8.4.1 MULTITOUCH MISDETECTION BY THE OPERATION PANEL DUE TO AN AM RADIO SIGNAL MultiTouch is detected even though only a single point on the operation panel is • touched. If there is an AM radio tower near the machine’s location, the person using the •...
  • Page 947 Troubleshooting Keep your finger on the cross at the top right. Check the result, and if the detection level is "3" or "4", adjust the MultiTouch sensitivity. <Displayed Result Example> Detection Level 1 (Best): No Problem. (Not required to adjust the sensitivity level.) •...

  • Page 948: Problems And Errors Related To Hardware

    Troubleshooting Environment", if the detection level is "3" or "4", you are receiving the external noise influence, so adjust the sensitivity level. The sensitivity level can be adjusted between "0" and "10". (Default: 10). If set to "0", the • MultiTouch function is turned off.
  • Page 949 Troubleshooting Symptom Solution The touch panel’s coordinates have Connecting a commercially available USB mouse • shifted substantially, resulting in not enables the same operation as the touch panel. So being able to execute its calibration. you can execute the calibration Execute the Panel Self Check, or the TouchPanel •...
  • Page 950 Troubleshooting Symptom Solution USB cable between the operation panel and the MFP is disconnected, damaged or defective. Solution Reconnect or replace the USB cable. For details about how to replace the USB cable, refer to the service manual for the MFP. Reference For details about SC672, refer to the service manual for the MFP.

  • Page 951: Errors Related To Applications

    Troubleshooting 8.4.3 ERRORS RELATED TO APPLICATIONS Applicable applications Copy (Classic) / Scanner (Classic) / Printer (Classic) / Document Server / Quick Copy / Quick Fax / Quick Scanner / Web Browser / Quick ID Card Authentication Config* *Depends on the model whether it is a pre-installed application If an error related to the application occurs, the operation panel’s operating system automatically restarts the application (with a confirmation dialog box).

  • Page 952: Factory Reset And Restoration

    Troubleshooting 8.4.4 FACTORY RESET AND RESTORATION This section explains the Factory Reset and subsequent procedure. Factory Reset may be DO NOT USE the “Wipe data/factory” feature (recovery mode) of SOP in the field. • executed when an abnormal operation due to the system or an application occurs or when •...
  • Page 953 Troubleshooting A reconfirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes]. The message “wiping data…” appears and the data and cache are cleared (within 1 minute). On completion, the displayed screen returns to the recovery mode menu. If you reboot the machine as is, the machine cannot display the messages in the local language because of the absence of the LegacyUI data.

  • Page 954: Errors That Occur During Application Update From An Sd Card

    Troubleshooting 8.4.5 ERRORS THAT OCCUR DURING APPLICATION UPDATE FROM AN SD CARD Error Messages Error message Explanation Solution Insert a correct SD card. • Remove the SD card and insert it again. Make sure that the directory of • the SD card is correct. You must create the "app"...

  • Page 955: Error Codes

    Troubleshooting Error Codes Error codes may appear along with the message reporting the installation failure. Error Explanation Code 215-01 Installation of an application that cannot be used according to the system configuration was attempted. (Example: This occurs when installing an application with the copier, scanner and fax functions on a non-MFP printer.

  • Page 956: Errors That Occur During Update From The Edc Server

    Troubleshooting 8.4.6 ERRORS THAT OCCUR DURING UPDATE FROM THE EDC SERVER Example of an error code display XXX (3 digit error) Error Explanation code Server connection error Signature verification error License error (for example, the product key was keyed in wrongly) Dependency check error Displayed when the control panel firmware version does not meet the installation requirement of the application.
  • Page 957 Troubleshooting Error Explanation Solution code 101-802 SSL communication failed Check the network settings of the device. 101-803 Proxy authentication failed Check the proxy settings of the device. 101-804 Proxy Connection Timeout Check the proxy settings of the device. 101-805 The server is under maintenance. Resume the operation after Connection timeout.

  • Page 958: Other Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting 8.4.7 OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING Operation Panel Unit HW: Hardware issue, SW: Software issue Symptom Cause Solution Both the Smart Operation HW The Smart Operation Reconnect the USB Panel and the blue LED on Panel cannot be supplied cable between the the operation panel do not with electrical power.
  • Page 959 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES...
  • Page 961 1.4.2 1 BIN TRAY UNIT (D574) .................. 1-14 2. APPENDICES: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES ... 2-1 2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES ....................2-1 2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR IM C300 SERIES ......2-1 2.1.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR IM C400 SERIES ......2-4 3. SP MODE TABLES ..............3-1 3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ..................
  • Page 962 Display on the Control Panel Screen ..............3-5 Others ........................3-6 3.2 SP1-XXX (FEED) ......................3-8 3.3 SP2-XXX (DRUM) -1 ....................3-42 3.4 SP2-XXX (DRUM) -2 ....................3-74 3.5 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) ....................3-130 3.6 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) ....................3-179 3.7 SP5-XXX (MODE) ...................... 3-195 3.8 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS) ..................
  • Page 963 PDL detection by the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter ....4-3 PDL selection and switching ................... 4-3 Triggers ........................4-4 Some possible problems ..................4-5 Printer Bit Switch description .................. 4-5 4.2.3 PRINT IMAGES ROTATION................4-6 Printer Bit Switch description .................. 4-6 4.2.4 PJL USTATUS .....................

  • Page 965: Appendices: Specifications

    APPENDICES: SPECIFICATIONS R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P ag e Dat e Add ed/ Upd at ed /N ew 04/01/2020 Updated Copy Speed...

  • Page 967: Mainframe

    New QSU fusing technology (DH fixing system) Original type: Sheets, book, three-dimensional object Maximum original size: A4 (8.5" x 14 ") Copy Speed (IM C300 series): 30cpm (A4)/31 cpm (LT) (A4 SEF/LT SEF(60-105 g/m ⇒ Copy Speed (IM C400 series): IM C400F: •...
  • Page 968 • B&W: 6.2 seconds IM C400SRF: • Full Color:7.9 seconds • B&W: 6.7 seconds Warm-up time: IM C300 series: • (23°C (73.4°F), rated voltage) Normal mode: 48 seconds • Quick mode: 19 seconds IM C400 series: • Normal mode: 48 seconds •...
  • Page 969 IM C300F 120–127 V, 10 A, 60 Hz • IM C400 series 120–127 V, 12 A, 60 Hz EU/Asia • IM C300 series 220–240 V, 5 A, 50/60 Hz • IM C400 series 220–240 V, 7 A, 50/60 Hz Taiwan •...
  • Page 970 • IM C400F 0.65W Noise emission: Sound power level with full system • IM C300 series Stand-by: 31.3 dB (A) Copying: B&W: 68.1 dB (A) / Color: 68.4 dB (A) • IM C400F Stand-by: 31.3 dB (A) Copying: B&W: 71.6 dB (A) / Color: 70.2 dB (A) •...
  • Page 971 The full system consists of the main unit, 1-bin unit and two paper tray units. *The complete system of the IM C300 series/C400F consists of the main unit, three paper tray units, and 1-bin tray unit . *The complete system of the IM C400SRF consists of the main unit and three paper tray units.

  • Page 972: Printer

    Specifications 1.1.2 PRINTER Items Specifications Printer Standard: PJL, PCL 5c/6, PostScript 3 Emulation, PDF Emulation, languages: MediaPrint(JPEG, TIFF) Option: Genuine Adobe PostScript 3/PDF, PictBridge, XPS Resolution: 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi, 1200 dpi Resident fonts: PostScript 3/PDF Emulation, PCL 5c/6: 93 fonts Genuine Adobe PostScript 3/PDF: 136 fonts Host interfaces: Standard:...

  • Page 973: Scanner

    Specifications 1.1.3 SCANNER Items Specifications Scanning method: Full-color scanner/Flatbed scanning Scanning resolution: 200 dpi TWAIN Mode: • Exposure glass: 100 to 1200 dpi • ADF: 100 to 600 dpi WIA Mode: • 100 to 1200 dpi Grayscales: Black & White: 2 tones Full Color/Gray Scale: 256 tones Scanning Throughput: B&W, Color:...

  • Page 974: Supported Paper Sizes

    Supported Paper Sizes 1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES 1.2.1 PAPER FEED Paper Size Main Tray Paper Feed Unit Bypass Tray A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B6 SEF...

  • Page 975: Paper Exit

    Supported Paper Sizes 1.2.2 PAPER EXIT Main Tray, 1 Bin Tray Paper Size Main Tray 1 Bin Tray A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B6 SEF...
  • Page 976 Supported Paper Sizes Internal Finisher Paper Size Paper exit Staple Shift Shifting Single stitch Stapling amount A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B6 SEF...
  • Page 977 Supported Paper Sizes Custom: Paper exit Shift Shifting Width 76.2 - 216.0 mm 148.0 - 216.0 mm 3.00 - 8.50 inch 5.83 - 8.50 inch Length 139.0 - 600.0 mm 139.0 – 356.0 mm 5.48 – 23.62 inch 5.48 -14.01 inch Remarks A: Paper through, paper exit available.
  • Page 978 Software Accessories 1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows you to select which components to install. 1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS Windows Type PCL6 Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate Enterprise...

  • Page 979: Scanner And Lan Fax Drivers

    Software Accessories Type PCL6 Datacenter : Supported -: Not supported Mac OS Environment Printer Utility for Mac macOS 10.12 Sierra macOS 10.13 High Sierra macOS 10.14 Mojave : Supported -: Not supported 1.3.2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS Operating system for TWAIN driver: •...

  • Page 980: Optional Equipment

    Optional Equipment 1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 1.4.1 PAPER FEED UNIT (D3GQ) Paper Feed System: Feed Roller and Friction Pad Paper Height Detection: Empty only Tray Capacity: 500 sheets Paper Weight: 60 to 163 g/m (16 to 43.5 lb.) Paper Size: A5 SEF to A4/LG SEF Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the mainframe) Power Consumption:...

  • Page 981: Maintenance Tables

    APPENDICES: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES...
  • Page 983 Maintenance Tables 2. APPENDICES: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES 2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES 2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR IM C300 SERIES Chart: A4 (LT)/5% Mode: 2 prints/job Color Ratio: 30% Environment: Normal temperature and humidity Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
  • Page 984 PM/Yield 36k 60k EM Remarks Parts PCDU The PCDU (K) for IM C300 series is different from IM C400 series. Make sure of the correct part number before ordering it. PCDU At color ratio 30%, the replacement interval is 120k.
  • Page 985 Maintenance Tables Item PM/Yield 60k 120k EM Remarks Parts Fusing thermopile Remove the toner, wax, and paper dust (TH1) with a dry cloth. Pressure roller Remove the toner, wax, and paper dust with a dry cloth. Paper Transport The PM count for the following items is based on the sheets of copy paper fed: Item PM/Yield 60k 120k EM...

  • Page 986: Preventive Maintenance Items For Im C400 Series

    Maintenance Tables Others The PM count for the following items is based on the sheets of copy paper fed: Item PM/Yield 90k EM Remarks Parts Waste toner Replace if the waste toner bottle is detected to bottle be full. Ozone filter Paper Feed Unit (Optional) The PM count for the following items is based on the sheets of copy paper fed: Item...

  • Page 987: Made By The Machine Will Not Reach The Target Yield Within The Machine's Targeted Lifetime If The Machine Is Used Under The Target Usage Conditions (Acv, Color Ratio, And P/J). So, These Parts

    PM/Yield 36k 60k EM Remarks Parts PCDU The PCDU (K) for IM C300 series is different from IM C400 series. Make sure of the correct part number before ordering it. PCDU At color ratio 30%, the replacement interval is 120k.
  • Page 988 Maintenance Tables Item PM/Yield 36k 60k EM Remarks Parts PCDU At color ratio 30%, the replacement interval is 120k. PCDU At color ratio 30%, the replacement interval is 120k. Transfer Unit The PM count for the following items is based on the sheets of copy paper fed: Item PM/Yield Parts 120k...
  • Page 989 Maintenance Tables Item PM/Yield 60k 120k 300K EM Remarks Parts (S31) wipe with a dry cloth. Duplex entrance Clean with a blower brush or sensor (S1) wipe with a dry cloth. Duplex exit sensor Clean with a blower brush or (S2) wipe with a dry cloth.
  • Page 990 Maintenance Tables Paper exit tray Wipe with a damp cloth, and then wipe the dry cloth. 1-bin tray exit sensor Clean with a blower brush or wipe with a dry cloth. 1-bin tray paper remaining Clean with a blower brush or wipe with a sensor dry cloth.

  • Page 991: Sp Mode Tables

    APPENDICES: SP MODE TABLES...

  • Page 993: Service Program Mode

    Service Program Mode 3. APPENDICES: SP MODE TABLES 3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE • Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to process the data.

  • Page 994: Exiting Sp Mode

    Service Program Mode Press and hold the button [A] located at the left side of the operation panel and "Check Status [B]" at the same time, until the number keyboard is displayed. Enter the key code for SP mode. For details of the key code to enter the SP mode, ask your supervisor. Exiting SP Mode •...

  • Page 995: Sp Mode Button Summary

    Service Program Mode SP Mode Button Summary Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons. Opens all SP groups and sublevels. Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display. Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen, Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number.

  • Page 996: Switching Between Sp Mode And Copy Mode For Test Printing

    Service Program Mode Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group. Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display (page). Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line). 10 Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.

  • Page 997: Service Mode Lock/Unlock

    Service Program Mode appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previous setting. • Press [#] to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a number that is out of range.) • Press "Yes" when you are prompted to complete the selection. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window and select the settings for the test print.

  • Page 998: Others

    Service Program Mode Item Description Paper Type N: Normal paper MTH: Middle thick paper TH: Thick paper Paper Feed P: Paper tray Station B: Bypass table Color Mode [K]: Black in B&W mode [Color] [Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode [YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan [FC]: Full Color mode [FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full...
  • Page 999 Service Program Mode numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers. SSP: This denotes a "Special Service Program" mode setting. SM Appendices D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB...

  • Page 1000: Sp1-Xxx (Feed)

    SP1-XXX (Feed) 3.2 SP1-XXX (FEED) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to or CTL Max/Init./Step] 1-001-001 Leading Edge Tray: Plain [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / Registration 0.1mm/step] 1-001-002 Leading Edge Tray: Middle Thick [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / Registration 0.1mm/step] 1-001-003 Leading Edge...
  • Page 1001 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to or CTL Max/Init./Step] 1-001-021 Leading Edge Duplex: Special 1 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 / Registration 0.1mm/step] 1-001-022 Leading Edge Tray: Special 1: 1200 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 / Registration 0.1mm/step] 1-001-023 Leading Edge...
  • Page 1002 1-002-006 Side-to-Side Tray 4 [-4.0 to 4.0 / 0.0 / Registration 0.1mm/step] 1-003-001 Paper Buckle Tray1: Plain IM C300 series: [-5.0 to 5.0 / 2.0 / 0.1mm/step] IM C400 series: [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-003-002 Paper Buckle Tray1: Middle Thick [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 /...
  • Page 1003 1-003-012 Paper Buckle Duplex: Thick [-5 to 5 / 0 / 1mm/step] 1-003-013 Paper Buckle Tray1: Plain:1200 IM C300 series: [-5.0 to 5.0 / 2.0 / 0.1mm/step] IM C400 series: [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-003-014 Paper Buckle Tray1: Mid.
  • Page 1004 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step] Detection Mode 0: OFF 1: ON 1-010-002 Size Set Miss Small Size Miss Set Detection IM C300 series: [0 to Detection Mode 1 / 0 / 1/step] IM C400 series: [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: OFF...
  • Page 1005 1-013-001 Tray Down Erro Tray1 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] Flag 1-105-001 Print Target Plain1:FC:Center ENG* IM C300 series: [100 Temperature to 180 / 134 / 1deg/step] IM C400 series: [100 to 200 / 155 / 1deg/step] 1-105-003 Print Target...
  • Page 1006 Thick3:BW:Center ENG* [100 to 180 / 142 / Temperature 1deg/step] 1-105-029 Print Target Special1:FC:Center ENG* IM C300 series: [100 Temperature to 180 / 134 / 1deg/step] IM C400 series: [100 to 200 / 155 / 1deg/step] 1-105-031 Print Target Special1:BW:Center...
  • Page 1007 [Min to or CTL Max/Init./Step] to 200 / 165 / 1deg/step] 1-105-035 Print Target Special2:BW:Center ENG* IM C300 series: [100 Temperature to 180 / 134 / 1deg/step] IM C400 series: [100 to 180 / 155 / 1deg/step] 1-105-037 Print Target...
  • Page 1008 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to or CTL Max/Init./Step] Temperature Speed 1deg/step] 1-105-123 Print Target Special 2:BW:Center:Low ENG* [100 to 180 / 124 / Temperature Speed 1deg/step] 1-105-125 Print Target Special 3:FC:Center:Low ENG* [100 to 180 / 136 / Temperature Speed 1deg/step]...
  • Page 1009 1: 178mm/s (Type a,b) 2: 212mm/s (Type b) 3: 252mm/s (Type b) 1-112-002 Image Processing Temp.:Plain:Center:Energy ENG* IM C300 series: [-30 Temp. Correct Saving to 20 / 13 / 1deg/step] IM C400 series: [-30 to 20 / 16 / 1deg/step]...
  • Page 1010 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to or CTL Max/Init./Step] 1: ON 1-120-001 Fuser Logs Mode Switch ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] acquisition 1-120-002 Fuser Logs Period Switch ENG* [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] acquisition 1-131-001 Continuous Print Feed Permit Condition Setting...
  • Page 1011 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to or CTL Max/Init./Step] Feed Judg. 0: OFF 1: ON 1-141-001 Fusing SC Issue SC Number ENG* [0 to 99999 / 0 / Time Info 1/step] 1-141-101 Fusing SC Issue Heating Roller Temperature ENG* [-100 to 260 / 0 / Time Info...
  • Page 1012 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to or CTL Max/Init./Step] Time Info 1-141-162 Fusing SC Error Heater1 Duty Det 2 ENG* [0 to 100 / 0 / Time Info 1%/step] 1-141-163 Fusing SC Error NC Sensor: Center Det Temp ENG* [0 to 2000 / 0 / Time Info...
  • Page 1013 1: 178mm/s (Type a,b) 2: 212mm/s (Type b) 3: 252mm/s (Type b) 1-158-005 Abnormal Noise Heat Center Target Temp ENG* IM C300 series: [100 Confirmation to 180 / 154 / 1deg/step] IM C400 series: [100 to 180 / 180 / 1deg/step]...
  • Page 1014 [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 / Adjustment 0.01%/step] 1-801-053 Motor Speed Col Drum/Dev. Mot: Std Speed ENG* IM C300 series: [-6 Adjustment to 6 / 0 / 1STEP/step] IM C400 series: [-5 to 5 / 0 / 1STEP/step] 1-801-054 Motor Speed Col Drum/Dev.
  • Page 1015 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to or CTL Max/Init./Step] 1-801-081 Motor Speed Transport M: Plain1/2: Std Spd ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 / Adjustment 0.01%/step] 1-801-082 Motor Speed Transport M: Thin:Std Spd2 ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 / Adjustment 0.01%/step] 1-801-084 Motor Speed...
  • Page 1016 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to or CTL Max/Init./Step] Print 1-907-001 Paper Feed Tray1 Clutch ON: Plain [-10 to 10 / 0 / Timing Adj. 1mm/step] 1-907-002 Paper Feed Tray1 Clutch ON: Middle Thick [-10 to 10 / 0 / Timing Adj.
  • Page 1017 Large Category Small Category [Min to or CTL Max/Init./Step] 1-907-022 Paper Feed Exit Junction Solenoid: ON IM C300 series: [-40 Timing Adj. to 20 / -9 / 1mm/step] IM C400 series: [-40 to 20 / -14 / 1mm/step] 1-907-025 Paper Feed...
  • Page 1018 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to or CTL Max/Init./Step] 1-907-045 Paper Feed Tray3: 1st Leading Edge Pos.: ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / Timing Adj. Mid. Thick 1mm/step] 1-907-046 Paper Feed Tray3: 1st Leading Edge Pos.: ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / Timing Adj.

This manual is also suitable for:

Im c300fIm c400fIm c300srfD0caD0c9D0c8 ... Show all

Table of Contents